JP2021023685A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To reduce the burden of control.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: display means (display device 41) capable of displaying information related to a game; performance control means (performance control device 300) for controlling the display on the display means; and start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit of the start memory that is the right to execute the game on the basis of a winning of a game ball to a start area (first start winning port 36, second start winning port 97, ordinary variable winning device 37). The performance control means can display information on the start memory corresponding to the game being executed by a display mode of the executing memory display corresponding to the start memory. The display mode of the executing memory display is selected based on the selection using a first selection table and the selection using a second selection table selected according to a selection result using the first selection table.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on a prize in a starting area and generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) displayed on a variable display device provided in the game area based on the fact that the game ball wins a prize at the start port provided in the game area (starting prize). ) Is variablely displayed, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened is set. In such a game machine, a look-ahead notice effect that gives a notice about the start memory before starting the variable display game about the start memory, an effect corresponding to the variable display game being executed, and the like are selected from a plurality of types. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-180269

In order to enhance the interest of the production, it is preferable to select from a wide variety of productions, but the burden of control increases as the types of productions that can be selected increase.
An object of the present invention is to reduce the burden of control.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the game is executed based on the winning in the starting area and the result of the game is a special result.
Display means that can display information about the game,
An effect control means for controlling the display in the display means,
A start storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit of start memories, which is the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball in the start area, is provided.
The effect control means
The information of the start memory corresponding to the game being executed can be displayed by the display mode of the running memory display corresponding to the start memory.
The selection of the display mode of the running storage display is performed by the selection using the first selection table and the selection using the second selection table selected by the selection result using the first selection table. It is a feature.

According to the present invention, the burden of control can be reduced.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the detail of a batch display device. It is a figure explaining the detail of the production operation part. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 variation start process, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 variation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the jackpot end setting process 1, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of a virtual drawing space (frame buffer). It is a flowchart explaining one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variable command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the advance notice effect setting process 1. It is a figure explaining an example of the display on a display device. It is a figure explaining an example of a step-up notice. It is a figure explaining another example of a tentative image. It is a figure explaining the example of the storage position of a temporary image data. It is a figure explaining the execution ratio of a suggestion effect. It is a flowchart explaining the suggestion effect setting process. It is a figure explaining the limit period at the time of a power failure. It is a flowchart explaining the limit period setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the limited period management process. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect using the standby notification display. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect using the standby notification display. It is a figure explaining another example of the effect using the standby notification display. It is a figure explaining another example of the effect using the standby notification display. It is a figure explaining another example of the effect using the standby notification display. It is a figure explaining another example of the effect using the standby notification display. It is a figure explaining an example of the 1st specific effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the 1st specific effect. It is a figure explaining another example of the 1st specific effect. It is a figure explaining another example of the 1st specific effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the 2nd specific effect. It is a figure explaining another example of the 2nd specific production. Decorative special figure It is a figure explaining the display mode of the start memory display and the execution memory display, and the change effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a change effect. Decorative special figure It is a figure explaining an example of the table which selects the change of the start memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of the table which selects the change of the memory display during execution. It is a front view of the game board of the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the 1st special figure variation winning apparatus of the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the various probabilities of the first modification and the opening mode of the special variation winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state of the 1st modification. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the game machine of the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing of the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the specific area switch monitoring process of the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit residual sphere processing of the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge 13. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

Further, above the glass frame 15, a lighting device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and a motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a payout abnormality are provided. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a frame decoration device 18 having a built-in lamp or the like to emit light for decoration or production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. There is. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect operation unit 550 that receives an operation input from the player. The effect operation unit 550 is an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a press operation input from the player, and further, the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is in contact with the player. A touch panel 29 for receiving an operation input is provided. A key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card are ejected from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 to be operated, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the game machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device directs the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, the player operates the effect operation unit 550 to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). Can be done.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the upper right portion of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 includes two arms to which the sub display device 42 is attached to the tip end portion, and the sub display device 42 is attached to the display device 41 by rotating the arm around the base end portion. It is possible to convert between a state in which they overlap in the front-back direction and a state in which they do not overlap.
Further, a board effect device 44 is provided in front of the display device 41 in the center case 40 and near the lower end of the display area. The board effect device 44 can operate from a position near the lower end of the display area to the center side of the display area as shown by a dotted line.
Further, a board decoration device 46 capable of producing an effect by light emission is provided at a position in front of the display device 41 in the center case 40 and overlapping the left and right ends of the upper end of the display area.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 6).
In addition, three left side general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one right side on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal drawing start gate 34. A general winning opening 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 6).

The game ball that has passed through the Fuzu start gate 34 can flow into the right general winning opening 35 provided below the Fuzu start gate 34. Due to a plurality of obstacle nails provided below the Fuzu start gate 34, only a part of the game ball that has passed through the Fuzu start gate 34 flows into the right general winning opening 35 provided below the Fuzu start gate 34. In addition to being possible, game balls that have not passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 are prevented from flowing into the right general winning opening 35.

Further, a first display unit 621 capable of executing a first suggestion effect suggesting a probability set value is provided in front of the normal drawing start gate 34. The first suggestion effect can be executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal drawing start gate 34. Further, a second display unit 622 capable of executing a second suggestion effect suggesting a probability set value is provided on the front surface of the right general winning opening 35 located below the normal drawing start gate 34. The second suggestion effect can be executed based on the passage of the game ball through the general winning opening 35.

Further, on the left side of the normal drawing start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided. ing.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right to easily flow in the game ball, and a partition wall 37d that regulates the inflow of the game ball. ing. The movable member 37b holds a state in which the distance from the partition wall 37d is made equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball by standing up at all times, that is, a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easily opened by the normal variable winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 6) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 6).

Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. There is.
The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The big winning opening is changed from the closed state (closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (favorable state for the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 6) as a driving device, and a large winning opening is provided during the special gaming state. By converting from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the large prize opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 6) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .. In the game machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball flowing into the large winning opening is detected by any of the large winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of large winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.

Further, below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) and a second special drawing that give a start condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) A winning device 90 is provided with a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game).
The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game ball flowing into the upper inflow port 90a into the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 6), and the game ball that has won the second starting winning opening 97 is the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 6). Detected by.
Further, below the winning device 90, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.

3A to 3C are front views of the winning device 90 of the present embodiment, showing a state in which the front cover member is removed.
As shown in FIG. 3A, the winning device 90 is provided with a distribution member 92 at a position directly below the inflow port 90a in the winning device 90. Further, a first start winning opening 36 is arranged at the lower left of the distribution member 92, and a second starting winning opening 97 is arranged at the lower right of the distribution member 92.
Further, a front cover member is provided so as to cover the front of the distribution member 92, the first starting winning opening 36, and the second starting winning opening 97. The front cover member is transparent or translucent so that the behavior of the game ball in the winning device 90 can be visually recognized.

The distribution member 92 can rotate about the shaft pin 92a along the front-rear direction, and the upper arm portion 92b extending upward from the position where the shaft pin 92a is arranged and the left arm portion 92c extending to the left. And a right arm portion 92d extending to the right. On the left side of the upper arm portion 92b of the three arms, a left holding portion 92e for temporarily holding the game ball is formed by the upper arm portion 92b and the left arm portion 92c, and on the right side of the upper arm portion 92b. The upper arm portion 92b and the right arm portion 92d form a right holding portion 92f that temporarily holds the game ball.
The distribution member 92 is at a position where the left holding portion 92e can receive the game ball flowing into the inflow port 90a as shown in FIG. 3B with the upper arm portion 92b always facing upward, and FIG. As shown in c), the right holding portion 92f can rotate between the position where the game ball flowing into the inflow port 90a can be received.

As shown in FIG. 3B, when the left holding portion 92e is in a position where the game ball flowing into the inflow port 90a can be received, the right holding portion 92f moves the game ball toward the second starting winning opening 97. It will be in a state of flowing down.
Further, as shown in FIG. 3C, when the right holding portion 92f is in a position where the game ball flowing into the inflow port 90a can be received, the left holding portion 92e moves toward the first starting winning opening 36. The ball is in a state of flowing down.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3A, a magnet 96a on the distribution member side is attached to the rear of the upper arm portion 92b of the distribution member 92. Further, of the base member 93 to which the distribution member 92 is mounted from the front, the base member side magnet 96b is attached to a position facing the distribution member side magnet 96a when the upper arm portion 92b is vertical. There is. The distribution member side magnet 96a and the base member side magnet 96b are attached so that the opposite poles are the same pole, and the upper arm portion 92b of the distribution member 92 is vertical due to the repulsive force of the magnets 96a and 96b. It is urged to rotate to either the left or right without staying in the state of. As a result, when the rotation of the distribution member 92 is stopped, either the left holding portion 92e or the right holding portion 92f can always receive the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a.

As shown in FIGS. 3 (b) and 3 (c), the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a is in a state of being acceptable toward the inflow port 90a of the left holding portion 92e and the right holding portion 92f. It is held by one holding part. When the game ball is held by one of the holding portions, the distribution member 92 rotates in the direction of the one holding portion due to the weight of the game ball, and the distribution member 92 rotates in the held game ball. It flows down toward the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97 in the direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the game ball that has flowed in by the left holding portion 92e is received, the distribution member 92 rotates to the left due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the first starting winning opening 36. After the guidance, as shown in FIG. 3C, the right holding portion 92f stops in a state where the next game ball can be accepted. Then, as shown in FIG. 3C, when the game ball that has flowed in by the right holding portion 92f is received, the distribution member 92 rotates to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the second start winning opening 97. After the guidance, as shown in FIG. 3B, the left holding portion 92e stops in a state where the next game ball can be accepted.

The game ball that has flowed down from the holding portions 92e and 92f is likely to flow into the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97, but may not flow in, and if it does not flow out, it goes out of the winning device 90. leak. In particular, if the momentum when flowing into the holding portions 92e and 92f is strong, there is a high possibility that the flow will not flow into the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97. In addition, you may be configured to always win a prize in any of the starting winning openings.

Further, as the distribution member 92 rotates, the other holding portion, which is not the holding portion that holds the game ball, becomes acceptable toward the inflow port 90a. Then, the next accepted game ball is guided to the winning opening on the other holding portion side. As a result, the game balls that sequentially flow into the inflow port 90a are alternately distributed to the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to aim for winning the winning device 90, and launches the game ball to the right game area (so-called right). By hitting), it is possible to aim for a prize in the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displaying various information is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4A, for example, the batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure variation display unit) 51 (A0 to A7) and a special figure 2 variation for a special figure 1 variation display game. Special figure 2 display (2nd special figure fluctuation display unit) 52 (B0 to B7) for display game and special figure 1 hold display 53 (C0, C1) for notification of start memory number of special figure 1 fluctuation display game ) And a special figure 2 hold display 54 (C2, C3) for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 (D0 to D3) that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times that the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed) and a gaming state that displays the gaming state of the gaming machine 10. It is provided with a display unit 56 (C6, C7, D7). The first game state display unit 56a (C6), which notifies the player of the left-handed (normal) and right-handed hitting methods (the hitting method corresponding to the game state), is displayed on the game state display unit 56. The second game state display unit 56b (C7), which notifies that the time is shortened (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), notifies that the jackpot probability state is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. A third game state display unit 56c (D7) is provided.
Further, the batch display device 50 includes a normal map display 57 (D4 to D6) for the normal map variation display game and a normal map hold display 58 (C4, C5) for notifying the start storage number of the normal map variation display game. I have.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), the variation symbol numbers are alternately changed. The LED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit (LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are off) and the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are lit (LED lamps A0, A2, A2). By alternately switching between A4 and A6 (the lights are off), it is displayed that the fluctuation is in progress. The switching cycle is set to, for example, 60 msec. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "off", the result mode of the off (for example, LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A1 is turned on. ~ A7 is turned off), and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode (special result mode) is a result mode other than the out-of-order result mode (for example, at least among the LED lamps A0 to A7). The game result is displayed in the mode (a mode in which the three are turned on). The special figure 1 display 51 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 2 variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (c), the variation symbol numbers are alternately changed. The LED lamps B0, B2, B4, B6 are lit (LED lamps B1, B3, B5, B7 are off) and the LED lamps B1, B3, B5, B7 are lit (LED lamps B0, B2, B2). By alternately switching between B4 and B6 (the lights are off), it is displayed that the fluctuation is in progress. The switching cycle is set to, for example, 60 msec. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "off", the result mode of the off (for example, LED lamp B0 is turned on and LED lamp B1 is turned on. ~ B7 is turned off), and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode (special result mode) of the hit is at least one of the result modes other than the missed result mode (for example, LED lamps B0 to B7). The game result is displayed in the mode (a mode in which the three are turned on). The special figure 2 display 52 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

The special figure 1 hold indicator 53 sets, for example, the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the first start winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. As shown in FIG. 4D, the display is performed by turning off, turning on, and blinking a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C0 and C1). The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.
The special figure 2 hold indicator 54 is the number of undigested balls among the number of winning balls to the second start winning opening 97 and the normal variable winning device 37, which are the fluctuation start conditions of the special figure 2 display 52 (starting memory number =). The number of holds) is displayed by turning off, turning on, and blinking a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C2 and C3), for example, as shown in FIG. 4D. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.

The round display unit 55 turns off all the LEDs (LED lamps D0 to D3) when not in the special game state, and in the special game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (e), depending on the result. The LED is turned on according to the number of rounds selected. The round display unit 55 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

As shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, the first game state display unit 56a turns off the LED when the left-handed hit is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed hit (during normal hit). In the case where right-handed is more advantageous for the player than left-handed (right-handed), the LED is turned on.
As shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, the second game state display unit 56b turns on the LED when it is in the time saving state, and turns off the LED when it is not in the time saving state.
As shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, the third game state display unit 56c turns on the LED when it is in a high probability state when the power is turned on, and turns off the LED when it is not in a high probability state.

In the normal map variation display game on the normal map display 57, during the variable display of the normal map variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (g), the variation symbol numbers are alternately changed to turn on the LED lamp D5. By alternately switching between the lighting state and the lighting state of the LED lamps D4 and D6, it is displayed that the LED lamps are changing. The switching cycle is set to, for example, 60 msec. Then, when the result is "hit", one of the plurality of LEDs (for example, LED lamp D4) is turned on to indicate that the result is "hit", and when the result is "missing", the plurality of LEDs One of them (for example, LED lamps D5 and D6) is turned on to indicate that it is out of order.
The normal figure hold indicator 58 determines the number of undigested balls (the number of normal figure start storage = the number of hold) among the number of passing balls of the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 57, for example. As shown in (h), the display is performed by turning off, turning on, and blinking a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C4 and C5).

FIG. 5 shows the details of the effect operation unit 550.
FIG. 5A is a plan view of the effect operation unit 550. As shown in FIG. 5A, the effect operation unit 550 of the present embodiment includes an effect button (push button) 25 and a touch panel 29 provided on the upper surface of the effect button (push button) 25. Has been done. That is, the effect operation unit 550 has a touch sensor function (touch panel function) in addition to the physical push button function.

Then, the sensitivity setting data, the LED brightness data, and the like are transmitted from the effect control board (effect control device) 300 to the effect operation unit 550, and the effect button is transmitted from the effect operation unit 550 to the effect control board (effect control device) 300. The push button signal (press detection signal) from the effect button switch (push sensor) 25a included in the (push button) 25 and the touch ON / OFF signal (contact / non-contact detection signal) from the touch sensor 29a included in the touch panel 29 are output. It is configured to be.

In the case of the present embodiment, the effect button switch (push sensor) 25a included in the effect button (push button) 25 is used to press the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 (the operation of pressing the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 to push down the effect operation unit 550). ) Is detected. Further, a plurality of points are provided on the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550, and the touch sensor provided on the touch panel 29 detects a contact operation with respect to the points provided on the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5B, nine points, "TSW1" to "TSW8" points and "Pa" points, are provided as a plurality of points. More specifically, the "TSW4" point provided in the center of the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550, the "TSW1" point provided on the left side of the "TSW4" point, and the back side (game) from the "TSW4" point. The "TSW3" point provided on the board 30 side), the "TSW6" point provided on the right side of the "TSW4" point, and the "TSW8" provided on the front side (player side) of the "TSW4" point. The "TSW2" point provided between the point, the "TSW1" point and the "TSW3" point, the "TSW5" point provided between the "TSW3" point and the "TSW6" point, and the "TSW6". A "TSW7" point provided between the point and the "TSW8" point and a "Pa" point provided between the "TSW8" point and the "TSW1" point are provided. The number of points is not limited to 9, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, in FIG. 5B, for convenience, each point of "TSW1" to "TSW8" is described as "TSW1" to "TSW8", but the effect operation unit 550 of the present embodiment includes FIG. As shown in (a), there is no such notation.

The touch sensor of the touch panel 29 can detect the contact operation at eight points of "TSW1" to "TSW8", and the "Pa" point does not detect the contact operation. Of course, the contact operation may be detected even at the "Pa" point. Further, LEDs of independent systems (full-color LEDs in the case of the present embodiment) are arranged at each of the nine points of the "TSW1" to "TSW8" points and the "Pa" points.

For the "Pa" point, for example, the LED of the "Pa" point can be used as a notification lamp for one-shot notification, or the LED of each point on the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 is sequentially turned on like a roulette to be the "Pa" point. Can be used for a definite system of production, such as using the LED of the above for the "probability (or probability variation confirmation)" point, and using the LED of the "Pa" point for the pre-reading accuracy production.

Here, the lighting brightness of the LED (specifically, the LED arranged at the "TSW1" to "TSW8" points, the "Pa" point, etc.) for illuminating the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 is adjusted (hole setting). , Player adjustment) is excluded. That is, the lighting brightness of the LED is not affected by the brightness adjustment and is constant. In addition, the touch sensor has a function of forcibly turning off the touch when the touch ON state (contact state) continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 35 seconds (basic setting)) (stops the output of the touch ON signal and touch OFF). It has a function to output a signal). That is, the touch sensor (touch detection IC) is configured so as not to detect continuous contact operations for a predetermined time or longer.

Examples of the player's operation detected by the effect operation unit 550 include the operation shown in FIG. 5 (c). "Single hit" is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 once, and "continuous hit" is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 a plurality of times at intervals within a predetermined time. “Long press” is an operation of holding down the effect operation unit 550 for a predetermined time or longer, and “touch” is an operation of touching the touch panel 29. "" Pa "operation (TSW1 or 8) + long press" is long in contact with one (or both) of the "Pa" point or two points adjacent to it, the "TSW1" point and the "TSW8" point. It is a pressing operation, and "flicking" is an operation of sliding the touch panel 29 while touching it so as to play it. Of course, the operations to be detected are not limited to these operations.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , 1st start winning opening 36, 2nd starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37 or special variable winning device 38, or flowing into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and playing area 32. Is discharged from. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning openings is increased according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 6) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 6) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided in the normal drawing start gate 34, and the game is played. When the game ball driven into the area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and the normal map variation display game is played. In addition, a state in which the normal figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, a state in which the normal figure change display game has already been played and the normal figure change display game has not ended, or a state in which the normal figure change display game is hit and a normal change winning device is used. When the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 when 37 is converted to the open state, if it is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4) of the normal figure start memory number, the normal figure start memory number is added (for example). +1) and one normal figure start memory will be stored. The stored number of the normal drawing start prizes is displayed on the general drawing hold display 58 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal map start memory, and this hit judgment random value is used as the judgment value. The result of the normal map variation display game is determined with reference to. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

The normal map fluctuation display game is provided in the batch display device 50 and is displayed by a variable display unit (normal map display) 52 composed of LEDs, and the lighting mode and lighting color of the LEDs are normal. Makes identification information (normal pattern, ordinary pattern). In addition, the general figure display 52 is configured by a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the figures, symbols, and character symbols for a predetermined time, they are stopped and displayed to display the result. You may. When the stop display of the normal fluctuation display game results in the normal map identification result, the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time as a hit of the normal map. As a result, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning opening inside the normal variable winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure variable display game is executed increases.

The winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97, and the winning ball to the ordinary variable winning device 37 are each of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 3 provided inside. It is detected by the switch 97a and the start port 2 switch 37a. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as the first starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). The game balls that have won the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as the starting winning balls of the second special figure variation display game, and the second starting memory is limited to a predetermined upper limit (for example, four). Is remembered in. Further, when the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random value, a jackpot symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random value is in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 6). The special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as the special figure start memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 4 times). Then, the stored number of the special figure start memory is displayed on the memory display unit (special figure 1 hold display 53, special figure 2 hold display 54) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed at the center. It is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display on the display device 41 of the case 40.

The game control device 100 is based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, or the ordinary variable winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof, and the special figure 1 display 51a (variable display device). Alternatively, the first or second special figure variation display game is played on the special figure 2 display 51b (variation display device). The first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are performed by displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode. In addition, a decorative special figure variable display game for variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) is executed on the display device (image display device) 41. Then, as a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51a or the special figure 2 display 51b becomes a special result mode (special result), it becomes a big hit and a special game state ( So-called big hit state). In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol) and the right variable display area (1st special symbol). In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed at which it is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 plays a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure start memories, and various effects such as the appearance of characters are performed to improve the interest.

The special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display may be performed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices and different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

Further, in a state where the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is 0, the first start winning opening 36 (or the second starting winning opening) When the game ball wins in 97 or the normal variable winning device 37), the starting memory is stored with the generation of the starting right, the starting memory number is added by 1, and the first special feature is immediately based on the starting memory. The figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by 1. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure variation display game has already been played, and the special figure variation display game ends. If the game ball wins the first start winning opening 36 (or the second starting winning opening 97 or the normal variable winning device 37) in a state where the game is not played or in a special game state, the starting memory number is the upper limit. If it is less than, the number of start memories is added by 1, and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the start memory number is 1 or more, the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure variation display game or the special game state). At the end), the number of start memories is subtracted by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning opening 97, and the starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37 The 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and are a non-contact type that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses a CPU operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. It also includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to exclude the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a backup storage means capable of holding the stored data even when the power is cut off. Then, when the power is restored, the control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived and displayed at a stage where the display results have not yet been derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. No display mode. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variablely displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a variable pattern random number for determining (including the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach or reach), a hit random number for determining the hit of the normal figure variable display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. A variable pattern table is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables based on the state), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state, the number of start memories, and the like. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37. 37a, starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning opening 97, gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, these switches An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the above is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the sensor and proximity switch are illegally shorted, the sensor and switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wires are cut and floated. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are the second inputs. It is input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, the third input port 124 is changed to a set value that serves as a detection means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting a probability set value to which a probability value that is a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of values. The signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operation unit that forms the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position, and is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it turns off.

The set value change switch 151 detects the operation of the set value change button forming the second operation unit of the operation units. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed, and is turned off when the set value change button is not pressed.

By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is a game. It is supposed to be used. Here, three settings 1 to 3 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability value assigned to each probability setting value is 1/320 in setting 1, 1/300 in setting 2, and 1/280 in setting 3. This probability value is a probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and then the power of the game machine is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. The probability setting value can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value change button in this probability setting value change state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

Further, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or after the power of the game machine is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is pressed. When it is turned to the second position, the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed in the probability setting value confirmation mode.

The probability set value display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value by a number of 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like. Further, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability set value information may be displayed by using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. In this case, the information of the probability setting value is displayed while the operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), and other than that, the calculated base value and accessory ratio are displayed. Give priority to display.

In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153, and the like, and the probability value used by the game control device 100 for the lottery of the special figure variation display game. Is used as a setting means that allows the assigned probability setting value to be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit. The function of the setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, the setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, the operation signals of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 so that the game control device 100 changes the probability setting value, or the setting sub-board side may change the probability setting value. The probability setting value may be changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152, and the determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). (Based signal), out-ball detection switch signal (signal based on detection by the out-switch that detects all game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game), and the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. A first input port 122 is provided.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state cannot be obtained is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting the opening / closing data of the above is provided. Further, the second output port 134 outputs the display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 that displays the selected probability setting value.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. , A fifth driver 138e is provided to receive the display data output from the second output port 134 and display it on the status display device 160.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.
The effect control device 300 is used to display images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. Wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a decorative LED provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and the first display unit 621 and the second display unit 622 that execute the suggestion effect of the probability set value. A board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 such as the above is provided. Further, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15. A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. The glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. Is also good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided to detect the above and input the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC-DC for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and ROM 111B. Compared with the judgment value stored in, the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure variation display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal figure display 52, a process of displaying the normal figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is performed. When the result of this normal figure variation display game is a hit, the normal figure display 52 displays a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. It is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the starting prize (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, and the first special figure variation display is performed based on this starting memory. A random value for determining the jackpot of the game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit or miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37 and the start port 3 switch 97a provided in the second start winning opening 97, and this is stored. Based on the start memory, a random value for jackpot determination of the second special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed. ..

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 changes the display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37). It serves as a game control means for controlling the progress.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b, and generates a special game state. Perform the process of causing. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A controls, for example, the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. .. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. Is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state (low probability state). In addition, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the 1st special figure fluctuation display game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation display game, the 1st special figure fluctuation display game and the 2nd special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a time saving state (also referred to as a specific game state, a high probability state of a normal figure, or a normal electric support state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. It can occur. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure hit probability) is set to a higher probability (normal figure high probability state) than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). It is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state.

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power release number, and the normal power release time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, 2 times) is obtained for one hit result of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal figure variation display game (normal figure hit probability) is higher than the normal probability in the normal operating state (normal figure low probability state, for example, 0/251). It is possible to have a high probability (general figure high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal figure fluctuation time, the normal figure stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the probability of hitting the normal figure. Try to extend the state conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states with different changes. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

The signal from the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 and the signal from the main body frame opening detection switch are input to the third input port 124, and the third input port 124 is set before the start of the standby time. By reading the state of the input port 124, the state of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 at the time of turning on the power and the open state of the front frame 12 (main body frame) can be grasped. As described above, when the power is turned on with the front frame 12 open and the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value can be changed. Will be. In addition, when the power is turned on while the setting value change button is pressed without turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, the RAM 111C is cleared (initialized). ing.

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the set value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue to operate the set value change button from the power-on until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power is not accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). When the timer value is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16), and if it is normal (step S16; Y), the power failure in the RWM. It is determined whether the value of the inspection area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy determining means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on. When the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S21). When the probability setting value is changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set.

In the case of the probability set value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the RAM initialization process and the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed are performed. Here, it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is cut off during the probability setting value change state and the RAM data is normally backed up. In this case, the probability setting is set again. The value is changed. Further, when the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, an area for a probability setting value, an area for an initial value random number, an area for a variation pattern random number, an area for game control, and an area for displaying a state are set in order from the beginning. In the area for the probability setting value, a probability setting value area for storing the information of the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. Will be done. This work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. Further, in the area for the initial value random number, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number, which are updated at any time, are stored. Further, the variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 that are updated at any time are stored in the variable pattern random number area. Further, in the game control area, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored and a stack area are set. Further, in the work area for displaying the status, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying the base value, the accessory ratio, and the like, and a stack area are set.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the number of payouts based on the winning in the winning area. The information to be displayed and necessary for displaying the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected by the outswitch and information on the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the bonus ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the prize opening from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present, during the big hit state (that is, fanfare and ending). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by character) obtained by winning the big prize opening (excluding the inside) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information necessary to display the character ratio. Includes, for example, information about the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information about the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by character).

The RAM clear start address 2 is the start address of the area for the initial value random number, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and The area for game control will be cleared. The area for initial value random numbers and the area for variable pattern random numbers may not be included in the clear target. Further, the RAM clear start address 1 described later is the start address of the area for the probability setting value, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number Area, area for variable pattern random numbers, and area for game control (work area and stack area) will be cleared. Further, the RAM clear start address 3 described later is the start address of the game control area, and the game control area is cleared by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set. Become.

The status display area is initialized when it is abnormal in the status display edit output processing in the timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 set in the case is set, the area for displaying the state may also be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM with the RAM clear start address 1 set, the entire area of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. One or more of the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, the area for the game control, and the area for displaying the state may be targeted. When targeting a plurality of areas, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the validity may be judged individually, or the checksums of each area may be added up to determine the validity. It may be judged collectively.

When the main body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the RAM initialization process and the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed are performed. If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N) or the main body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and the state of the third input port 124 read earlier It is determined from (step S24) whether the set value change switch is in the ON state.

If the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S30, and processing is performed when the power is normally restored from the power failure. When the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41 to initialize the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area. Perform processing. That is, the set value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 has data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. It serves as an initialization means for initializing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S16; N or step S17; N), and when it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S19; N), step S25 And the process of initializing all the RAM areas is performed. That is, the RAM area for the probability setting value and the RAM area for the status display are initialized only when a RAM abnormality occurs. Further, the area for initial value random numbers, the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the RAM area for game control are not only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). When the main body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. As will be described later, in steps S35 and S36, the RAM is initialized. In this case, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number are used. Area, area for variable pattern random numbers, and area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and initial values are saved. The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

When the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S27; N) or the main body frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), a command (specific information) for instructing the setting change is issued to the effect control board (effect control device). (300) is transmitted (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and the power of the gaming machine is shut off. Based on receiving the command of the setting change instruction, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and uses the speakers 19a and 19b. A notification prompting a change in the probability set value is performed by outputting voice or the like. This notification continues until the power of the game machine is cut off.

In this case, if the power of the game machine is turned off, the front frame 12 is opened, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, and the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. It is determined that the switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), and the process proceeds to step S35 to perform a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. When the control is stopped in step S29, the front frame 12 is not opened after the power of the game machine is cut off, or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the RAM data remains abnormal and the probability setting value cannot be changed to the changed state, so that the processes of steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

Although the notification is performed by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may perform the notification. For example, the batch display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100 may perform the notification, and the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may perform a display that is not used as identification information. Alternatively, a display for notifying an abnormality may be provided.

As a process when the power is normally restored from the power failure, in step S30 of FIG. 9, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S31).

Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S31; N), steps S32 and S33 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S34. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S31; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is provided. On (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S33).

Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. Proceed to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability set value information which is the information of the selected probability set value, and the screen designation Send multiple commands such as commands (for example, a customer waiting demo command when waiting for customers, a recovery screen command in other cases). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

The screen specification command sends a command according to the state of the restarted game. When resuming the special figure fluctuation display game that was interrupted by power interruption due to the resumption of control, a recovery screen command that provides recovery information is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, in this case, information regarding the result of the special figure variation display game to be restarted is also transmitted. In addition, when the power is cut off during the customer waiting state and the control is resumed in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen designation command. Further, when resuming the special game state interrupted by power interruption due to the resumption of control, a special game state resumption command is transmitted as a screen designation command.

Further, in step S35 of FIG. 9, the RAM area to be cleared should be cleared to 0 (step S35) and initialized as the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area (step S36). Here, when the backed up information is normal and the game is migrated from step S21 or S23, the RAM clear start address 2 is set, so that the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the game control are used. The RAM area (work area and stack area) of is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number.

On the other hand, when the backed up information is abnormal and the process proceeds from step S27, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, and the area for the variable pattern random number are set. And the area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared and the initial value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

The area to be initialized is an area in which a value other than 0 is desired to be set in the area cleared to 0, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Further, when all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value is set to 1 by setting 0 in the area for the probability setting value. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability, damage to the amusement store can be minimized even if the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or cheating. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, the probability setting value changing flag is set as a process of setting the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed (step S37). As a result, the probability set value is changed. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, the information of the probability set value currently set in the probability set value display device 153 can be displayed.

Then, the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). , Step S45. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and speakers 19a and 19b. Notifies that the probability setting value is being changed by outputting the voice by. Although the RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. In addition, settings for outputting a security signal are also made. In this case, a timer may be set so that the security signal is output for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period in which the probability set value is changed. Further, since the RAM has not been initialized yet, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be made.

Further, as the process of initializing the RAM area for game control, in step S41 of FIG. 9, the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the RAM area is initialized. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the power area (step S43). As a result, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S44, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability set value information which is the information of the selected probability set value, and the RAM initial A plurality of commands such as a conversion command (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

In step S45, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates the timer interrupt signal and the random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
Performs the process of starting the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). (Big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (win symbol random number)) as the initial value (start value) of RWM After saving in the area (step S47), the interrupt is permitted (step S48). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variation display. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol of the game. Further, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the hit stop symbol of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a game machine in which the random number of the initial value of the winning symbol does not exist.

Further, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value change method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S49, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S50), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S49) (step S48), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number update process in step S49 also includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. If such a method is adopted, both are initially used. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt, as in the present embodiment. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which causes the main processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S52; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S53), all. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S58) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S59). ), And then wait for the power of the game machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) capable of being operated from the outside, and an initialization operation unit. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time. It becomes.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

In the above main process, after the process of step S28 is performed, the process may be returned to the process of step S26, and the processes of steps S26 to S28 may be repeated until the setting key switch is turned on. .. That is, the control of the game may be stopped and the setting key switch may be turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124, not the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, if the state of repeating the processes of steps S26 to S28 continues for a certain period of time, the process may proceed to step S29 and wait for the power to be cut off.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state. The open state of the frame 12 does not have to be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition.

Further, the probability setting value change state may be entered only on the condition that the setting value change switch is in the ON state without providing the setting key switch. That is, if the process of steps S22 and S23 is not performed and the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 (step S24; Y), the process may proceed to step S35 of FIG. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 of FIG. 9 for initializing the area for initial value random numbers, the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. It is possible to initialize only the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the game control by terminating without doing or setting the same probability setting value. By shifting to the probability set value change state only on the condition that the set value change switch is in the ON state in this way, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be diverted.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the register bank 1 is first specified (step S101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (a large winning opening solenoid 38b, a general electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the random number update process 1 (step S105) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process, the special figure. 1. Random number update process 2 (step S106) for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Special Figure 2 is performed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and monitoring of errors ( Performs the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.).

Next, the probability setting value change process (step S108) for changing and confirming the probability set value is performed, and it is determined whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S109). When the probability setting value is changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S109; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S110). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability setting value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as a process related to the progress of the game, a payout command transmission process (step S111) that outputs a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, specially A special figure game process (step S112) for performing processing related to the figure variation display game and a normal figure game process (step S113) for performing processing related to the normal figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, in the case where the probability set value is changed (step S109; Y) or the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above processing related to the game. That is, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot proceed.

In addition, in the case of the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the payout command transmission process (step S111), the special figure game process (step S112), and the normal figure game process (step S113) should not be performed. However, one or more of these may be performed. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed so that the prize balls are paid out. Further, a process other than the above-described process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, the random number update process 1 (step S105) and the random number update process 2 (step S106) should not be performed in the probability set value change state, and the random number should not be updated in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. You can do it. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S114), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115), which checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio error, which checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step S116) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S117) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and a base value is obtained from the number of game balls detected by the outswitch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. The status display edit output process is performed (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 11, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variable winning device 37, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and the winning is given. Based on special figure variation display The game result pre-judgment is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance before the start of the game.
Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, refer to it in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be used is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A12) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged and the jackpot end process are performed. The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for the operation is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51a (step A15), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A16) related to the special figure 1 display 51a is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 51b (step A17), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A18) related to the special figure 2 display 51b is performed, and the special figure game process is completed. To do. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A15, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

The jackpot is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (first start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, start port 1 switch 36a), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is reached. Set the information indicating that there was a prize. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first starting port, which is the starting port of the special figure 1 (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the first starting port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of holding by the first starting port (first starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when the target start port switch (here, the start port 2 switch 37a) receives an input, the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is reached. Set the information indicating that there was a prize. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the second starting port, which is the starting port of the special figure 2 (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111; N), the process proceeds to step A116, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step A111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is operating, that is, the normal fluctuation. When it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning ball can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to the process of A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In step A113, it is determined that fraud has occurred when the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If it is determined in step A113 that no fraudulent electric power is occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting the information on hold by the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). After performing the special figure start port switch common process (step A115), the process proceeds to the process of step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A116, and subsequent processes are performed.

Next, the third start opening (second start winning opening 97) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A116), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, start port 3 switch 97a), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is reached. Set the information indicating that there was a prize. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the third starting port, which is the starting port of the special figure 2 (step A118).
If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning in the third starting port (step A118; N), the starting port switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A118 that there is a prize in the third starting port (step A118; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A119). ).

If it is determined in step A119 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A119 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A119; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120) and the effect command setting process (step A121) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third start opening (second start winning opening 97) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize at the third starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of holding by the third start port (second start winning port 97) (step A122), the special figure start port switch common process (step A123) is performed to monitor the start port switch. End the process.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, the number of times the winning start port switch to be monitored is won. The number of times the start port signal is output, which is the number of times the information about the game is output to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), and the number of outputs overflows. (Step A143).
When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), the process proceeds to step A145. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows, and the save is not performed.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, whether the number of special figure reservations (start memory) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. Determine (step A145).
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A145; Y). Step A146), prepare the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number (step A147), perform the effect command setting process (step A148), and perform the target start port winning flag. Is saved (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of special figure reservations is calculated (step A150), and the jackpot random number prepared by the hard random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110, and A117 is RWM. It is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special figure reservation information determination process (step A157).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, variation pattern random numbers 1 to 2) are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A154).
Next, the address of the variable order flag storage area (any place from hold 1 to 8) corresponding to the total of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold is calculated (step A155), and the calculated area is targeted. The variation order flag of (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) is saved (step A156), the special figure hold information determination process (step A157) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is completed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variable winning device 37. It serves as a start storage means for storing up to a predetermined number as start memory that is the right to execute a variable display game. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) first sets various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36, which is the starting opening of FIG. 1, up to a predetermined number. The second start is stored as a start memory, and various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 and the normal variable winning device 37, which are the starting openings of the special figure 2, up to a predetermined number. Remember as a memory.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A157) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 14, first, a low probability determination flag is prepared (step A161), and a look-ahead that determines whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit low probability determination value). The jackpot determination process (step A162) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is set as the determination result (step A163).
When it is determined in step A163 that a jackpot has been set as the determination result (step A163; Y), a jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A164) and prepared in step A152. The stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A165), and the process proceeds to step A167.
On the other hand, in step A163, when it is determined that the jackpot is not set as the determination result (step A163; N), that is, when the determination result is out of alignment, the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step A166). ), The process proceeds to step A167.

In step A167, the stop symbol information acquired in step A165 or the stop symbol information set in step A166 is saved in the symbol information area (step A167).
Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process (step A169) is performed.
Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared (step A170), and a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step A171) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit high probability determination value). Is performed, and it is determined whether or not a jackpot is set as a determination result (step A172).
When it is determined in step A172 that a jackpot has been set as the determination result (step A172; Y), a jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A173), and preparation is performed in step A152. The stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired (step A174), and the process proceeds to step A176.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A172 that the jackpot is not set as the determination result (step A172; N), that is, when the determination result is out of alignment, the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step). A175), the process proceeds to step A176.

In step A176, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step A176).
If it is determined in step A176 that the probability of the special figure is not high (step A176; N), the process proceeds to step A178.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A176 that the special figure is in high probability (step A176; Y), the stop symbol acquired in step A174 is placed in the symbol information area where the stop symbol information is saved in step A167. The information or the stop symbol information set in step A175 is overwritten and saved (step A177), and the process proceeds to step A178. The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for pre-reading of fluctuation patterns and the like.

In step A178, a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A178), and the effect command setting process (step A179) is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the effect control device 300 transmits the result of determination by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result of determination by the jackpot high probability determination value. Will be done.
Next, the special figure information setting process (step A180) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A181).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A182), the effect command setting process is performed (step A183), and the special figure hold information determination is performed. End the process. The special figure information setting process in step A180 and the variation pattern setting process in step A181 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, the pre-reading stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.
That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, is it a special result? (Judge whether or not, etc.) Make a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
Next, the details of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (steps A162, A171) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 15, in the look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A191), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A192).

If it is determined in step A192 that the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A192; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A197), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A192 that the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A192; N), it is determined whether the determination flag prepared immediately before the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a high probability determination flag. (Step A193).

When it is determined in step A193 that the high probability determination flag is used (step A193; Y), that is, when the look-ahead jackpot determination process is the process of step A171, the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set ( Step A194), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A196).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A193 that the flag is not the high probability determination flag (step A193; N), that is, when the look-ahead jackpot determination process is the process of step A162, the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set. (Step A195), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A196).

When it is determined in step A196 that the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A196; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A197), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A196 that the value of the target jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A196; N), that is, when it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A198). , Ends the look-ahead jackpot determination process.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the large winning opening opening processing is in progress (step A201). .. When the process of opening the large winning opening is in progress (step A201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the large winning opening switch 38a (step A203). Further, when the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not in progress (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the remaining ball of the large winning opening is being processed (step). A202).
If the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A202; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the large winning opening switch 38a (step A203). If the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is not in progress (step A202; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
Since the special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer reaches "0", the progress state of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

If it is determined in step A203 that there is no input to the large winning opening switch 38a (step A203; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A203 that there is an input to the large winning opening switch 38a (step A203; Y), a large winning opening count command is prepared (step A204), and an effect command setting process (step A205) is prepared. I do.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the processing is in progress while the large winning opening is open (step A206).

If it is determined in step A206 that the process is not in progress while the large winning opening is open (step A206; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A206 that the process is in progress while the large winning opening is open (step A206; Y), the number of large winning openings is updated by +1 (step A207), and the number of large winning openings is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, 9) or more is reached (step A208).

If the number of winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A208; N), the winning opening switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, when the number of large winning opening counts exceeds the upper limit value (step A208; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A209), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are both “0” (step A301).
If it is determined in step A301 that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are not "0" (step A301; N), the flag is loaded from the variation order flag storage area (for a total of 1 hold number). Then (step A302), it is determined whether or not the current variation is the variation shown in FIG. 1 (step A303).
If it is determined in step A303 that this change is the change of special figure 1 (step A303; Y), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A304). The effect command setting process (step A305) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. At this point, the special figure 1 hold number has not been updated by -1, but in step A304, a command corresponding to the -1 updated value (decorative special figure hold number command) is prepared.

On the other hand, in step A303, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation of special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, when the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of special figure 2, it corresponds to the number of reserved special figures 2. The decorative special figure hold number command to be performed is prepared (step A307), the effect command setting process (step A308) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is completed. At this point, the special figure 2 hold number has not been updated by -1, but in step A307, a command corresponding to the -1 updated value (decorative special figure hold number command) is prepared.

Further, in step A301, when it is determined that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A301; Y). In step A310), if the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; N), the customer waiting demo flag area is set with the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and the effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.
Next, "0" for the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A314), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A315), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315). Step A316). Then, the flag is saved during the fraud monitoring period in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 18A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321), and the first step is made. 1 The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A324) is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A325). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.
Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51a) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step A332). For example, 100 msec) is saved (step A333), the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variable symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is completed.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 18A is performed in the second start. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 18B, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the first step is made. 2 The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.
Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 51b) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 51b) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is saved (step A353), the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 19 shows the jackpot determination process (steps A364 and A374) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.
When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process ends.

When the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step A383).
Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If the probability is not high (step A383; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ..
When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process ends.
If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A388), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 20 shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A391), and if it is a big hit (step A391; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A392). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A393), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A394). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A395), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A396). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, special diagram 1 display 51a) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information (information indicating 16R or 6R in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A397), and the stop symbol number is obtained. The probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the above is acquired, saved in the probability variation determination data area (step A398), and the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A401). Here, the probability fluctuation determination data is information indicating which mode to shift to after the big hit, and in the present embodiment, in step A398, "low probability data (normal (without Fuden support))" and "high probability". Data 1 (probability variation (with Fuden support)) or "high probability data 2 (latent probability variation (without Fuden support))" is acquired and saved in the probability fluctuation determination data area.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A391; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A399), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A400), a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A401). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A402), and the effect command setting process (step A403) is performed. This decorative special drawing command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A404), the special diagram 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (step A405), and the special diagram 1 Stop The symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 21 shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A411), and if it is a big hit (step A411; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A412). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A413), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A414). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A415), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A416). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, special diagram 2 display 51b) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information (information indicating 16R or 6R in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A417), and the stop symbol number is obtained. The probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the above is acquired, saved in the probability variation determination data area (step A418), and the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A421).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A411; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A419), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A420), a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A421). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A422), and the effect command setting process (step A423) is performed. This decorative special drawing command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A424), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A425), and the special figure 2 Stop The symbol setting process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening 36, and the second starting winning opening 97 or the normal variable winning device 37. It serves as a variable display game execution means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A327, A347) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 is cleared (step A451). Next, the fluctuation time value table is set (step A452), the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is acquired, and saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A453).

Then, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step A454), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A455). Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A456), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (step A457). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A458), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A459). Next, the variation order flag storage area is shifted (step A460), the free area after the shift is cleared (step A461), and the variation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.
Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorative special figure variable display Set the detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A501), and an effect command setting process (step A502) is performed.
Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A503), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A504). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 800 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 msec.
Next, "2" related to the special figure display processing is set as the processing number (step A505), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A506).

Next, the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A507), and the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, special symbol 2) is saved. (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A508), and the number of symbol confirmations related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal is set in the signal control timer area. (For example, 256 ms) is saved (step A509). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51a, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51a is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A510). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 51b, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 51b is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A511), the processing during the special figure change is completed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special figure display processing, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process. The jackpot flag 2 set in step 2 is loaded (step A601), and a process of clearing the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM (step A602) is performed. Then, when it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A603) and it is determined to be a jackpot (step A603; Y), the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the second special figure variation display game is started. (For example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is ON, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is ON) is saved in the RWM test signal output data area (step A606). The upper limit table of the number of rounds is set (step A607).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A603 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A603; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A604), and the jackpot is a jackpot (step A604). When it is determined that A604; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is ON) regarding the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) of the first special figure variation display game is turned ON. (Turn on the signal per special symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A605), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A607).

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A607), the round number upper limit value (16R or 6R in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round number upper limit of the RWM is obtained. Save to the value area (step A608). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A609).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A610), and the effect command setting process (step A613) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A612), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A613) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A614), and the effect command setting process (step). A615) is performed.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 10000 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A616), and the jackpot illegal winning of the jackpot (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is saved. After clearing several areas (step A617), the fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information (step A618). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A619) is performed, and the special figure display processing is completed.

On the other hand, in step A604, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A604; N), "0" for the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A620), and the processing number is set as the special drawing game. Save in the process number area (step A621).
Next, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A622), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A623), and the special symbol display processing is terminated.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1 (step A619) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 25, in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A631), and the processing number is set as the special figure game processing number. Save to the area (step A632).

Next, the signal related to the start of the jackpot (special game state) (for example, 1 jackpot signal is ON, 2 jackpot signals are ON, 3 jackpot signals are ON, and 4 jackpot signals are ON) is saved in the external information output data area (for example, Step A633), a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, special symbol (2) The fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A634). Even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off. After that, clear the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state (step A635), save the number without time reduction in the game state display number area (step A636), and set the normal game mode flag. Save the low probability flag in the area (step A637).

Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A638), and the high probability notification flag is turned off in order to turn off the game state display LED (third game state display unit 58) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. Clear the area (step A639) and save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A640). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A641), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position) is saved. In order to save the designated signal 1 (ON) in the test signal output data area (step A642) and turn on the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56), the game state display number 2 area is on the right. The number in the hitting state is saved (step A643), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special game state occurs.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A701), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A702). , The effect command setting process (step A703) is performed.

Next, the large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A704), and the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening (step A705). , The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A706).
Next, a signal relating to the start of opening of the large winning opening (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A707), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is stored. Clear the information in the winning opening count area (step A708). Then, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A709), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in this jackpot end process, first, a subroutine call based on the probability fluctuation determination data is performed (step A1001).
In step A1001, when the probability fluctuation determination data is "low probability data (normal (no public electric support))", the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1002) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1005.
Further, in step A1001, when the probability fluctuation determination data is "high probability data 1 (probability change (with general electric support))", the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1003) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1005. To do.
Further, in step A1001, when the probability fluctuation determination data is "high probability data 2 (latent probability change (without universal power support))", the jackpot end setting process 3 (step A1004) is performed to perform the process of step A1005. Transition.

In step A1005, the probability information command is loaded and prepared from the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1005). Then, the effect command setting process (step A1006) is performed.
Next, "0" for the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A1007), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1008).
Next, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, turning off the jackpot 1 signal, turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and turning off the jackpot 4 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1009), and the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, , The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1010).
Next, the information in the probability determination flag area is cleared (step A1011), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared (step A1012), and the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area is in the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (step A1013), and the jackpot end process ends.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 28A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1002) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to no time saving state (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1021), and a signal relating to the start of the low probability state and no time saving state is performed. (For example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, normal symbol 1 high probability The status signal (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1022).

Next, the number without the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1023), the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1024), and the special figure game mode flag area is special. Figure Save the low probability & no time saving flag (step A1025).
Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1026), and the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 56) is turned off. In order to make the game state display number 2, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1027).
Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1028), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 28B shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1003) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of the time saving state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1031). Since the signal regarding the start of the time saving state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form.
Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is ON, special symbol 2 The variation time shortened state signal is turned ON, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1032).

Next, the number with the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1033), the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1034), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Special figure High probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1035).
Next, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1036), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 29 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (step A1004) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal relating to no time saving state (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1041), and a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and no time saving state is performed. (For example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned on, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, normal symbol 1 high probability The status signal (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1042).

Next, the number without the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1043), the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1044), and the special figure game mode flag area is set. Figure Save the high probability & no time saving flag (step A1045).
Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1046), and the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 56) is turned off. In order to make the game state display number 2, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1047).
Next, the probability information command (latent) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1048), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 30 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, the reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes the command from the game control device 100 and responds to it is performed, and the effect display editing process (step C13) that edits the setting and drawing command for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process that controls LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 (step). C18), the movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 31 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is non-zero (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of received commands is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. When it is determined that the copying of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 32 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step C232; N, step C233; N). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of jackpot commands (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when the MODE determines that the range of the symbol-based command is within the range (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, and a model specification command. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the one-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of the look-ahead variable system command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41. It is a production such as performing a production display on. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance of the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 when the start prize is won. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

In addition, commands related to power-on and commands related to probability setting values are processed by single-shot command processing. Examples of commands related to power-on include commands for power failure recovery and commands for RAM initialization. Examples of the command related to the probability setting value include commands for changing the probability setting, changing the probability setting value, ending the probability setting change, checking the probability setting value, and ending checking the probability setting value.

Various production contents are set based on the received command as described above. For example, for the image to be displayed on the display device 41, which is one of the effects set based on the command, first, scenario data for controlling the flow of the effect based on the received command is set, and the scenario data is used. Based on this, motion data for controlling the display contents is set according to the progress of the game, and a video is created by synthesizing a plurality of images drawn corresponding to the motion data. A display image is created for each frame of the image to be displayed on the display device 41, and the image is formed by sequentially displaying the display image. The display image of one frame is composed of superimposing a plurality of layers on which an image can be drawn. FIG. 33A shows a layer structure constituting a display image of one frame.

In the present embodiment, there are 14 types of layers 0 to 13 from the back side of the screen to the front side of the screen, and the content of the image to be drawn is defined for each layer. The background layer is a layer for drawing a background image, and the notice A layer to the notice H layer are layers for drawing various notice images such as a step-up notice.
The left symbol layer, the right symbol layer, and the middle symbol layer are layers for drawing the identification symbol of the decorative special symbol variable display game on the decorative special symbol variable display game display unit 85 (see FIG. 38), and the reserved layer is It is a layer for drawing the display (see FIG. 38) of the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84, and the fourth symbol layer is based on the fourth symbol on the second decorative game display unit 88 (see FIG. 38). Decorative special figure This is a layer for drawing a variable display game.

As shown in FIG. 33A, the control of the drawing content of each layer is managed by the corresponding motion management area. As shown in FIG. 33B, the motion management area is a display number (for example, left) which is the number (maximum number) of objects whose display is controlled (not necessarily displayed on the display screen 41a) in the corresponding layer. In the case of a symbol, an area (area for the number of displays) for storing the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol) and an area for storing the frame number indicating how many frames have been processed (frame number area) are provided. Including. In addition, an area for storing command positions (command position area) indicating the number of lines in the motion table in which a certain flow of production is defined, and a plurality of motion list tables (of multiple motion tables). An area (motion list table area) that stores address data (corresponding to the motion index) that indicates which table to use in the data list), and multiple display information areas that define the display contents of each object. including.

There are multiple display information areas in the motion management area for the number of displays (number of objects), and as shown in FIG. 33 (c), each display information area has a display type, an effect type, an effect parameter, and an upper left display. X coordinate of point, Y coordinate of upper left point of display, X coordinate of upper right point of display, Y coordinate of upper right point of display, X coordinate of lower left point of display, Y coordinate of lower left point of display, image index, background color, foreground color, It includes an area for storing each data of the frame count and the behavior index at the time of moving image of only IPicture (I picture).

Here, the display type is the type of the object (including information indicating whether it is a still image or a moving image (movie), as well as information indicating the type of the movie (whether it is an I picture, etc.)). The effect type is information indicating the type of effect (processing process such as giving transparency) to be added to the image. The effect parameter is a parameter of the effect (transparency when transparency is given, etc.). The X coordinate and the Y coordinate are data for specifying the display position of the image. In this example, for the polygon display function (the function of displaying a solid as a polyhedron), the display upper left point, the display upper right point, and the display lower left point are three. There are point coordinates. The image index is a number that identifies a still image or movie. The frame count at the time of moving image of only IPicture is data indicating which frame data is IPicture (that is, I frame). The behavior index is an index for setting the behavior of an object (display element).

The contents of the motion management area are set according to the scenario data set based on the command. The scenario data is set in the scenario layer, which is a conceptual scenario layer (layer) for hierarchically controlling the flow of production. There are eight scenario layers from 0 to 7, and each scenario layer has from 0 to 7. The scenario layer number of 7 is attached.
In the present embodiment, the scenario layer of scenario layer number 0 is mainly used for display control of the background image, scenario layer 1 is used for display control of the left symbol, scenario layer 2 is used for display control of the right symbol, and scenario layer 3 Is used for display control of the middle symbol, scenario layer 4 is used for display control of the first notice effect, scenario layer 5 is used for display control of the second notice effect, and scenario layer 6 is on hold display (standby memory display). A control target is basically assigned to each scenario layer, such as being used for display control of unit 83 and the display of the running storage display unit 84) and the scenario layer 7 being used for display control of the fourth symbol.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, the details of the one-shot command process (step C107) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 34.
When the one-shot command processing is started, first, in step C181, it is determined whether the MODE data commands the customer waiting demo, and if the customer waiting demo is commanded (step C181; Y), , Step C182, and if the customer waiting demonstration is not ordered (step C181; N), the process proceeds to step C184. The customer waiting demo is a customer waiting demo effect (or also referred to as a “customer waiting effect”), and is an effect including a customer waiting demo display performed by the display device 41. The customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the display on the display device 41, and may be displayed on another display device, the lamps may be lit (including blinking), or the effect may be output by sound.

Proceeding to step C182, it is determined whether the P machine state (pachinko game machine state) is in the customer waiting demonstration, and if it is in the customer waiting demonstration (step C182; Y), the single-shot command processing is finished and the customer waiting demonstration is in progress. If not (step C182; N), the customer waiting effect setting process for performing the customer waiting effect is performed (step C183), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Proceeding to step C184, it is determined whether or not the MODE data commands the value of the special figure 1 hold number, and when the value of the special figure 1 hold number is commanded (step C184; Y), Decorative special figure start When the single-shot command processing is terminated after executing the special figure 1 hold information setting process (step C185) that performs processing such as displaying the memory display, and the value of the special figure 1 hold number is not commanded ( In step C184; N), the process proceeds to step C186.
Proceeding to step C186, it is determined whether or not the MODE data commands the value of the special figure 2 hold number, and if it commands the value of the special figure 2 hold number (step C186; Y), Decorative special figure start When the single-shot command processing is terminated after executing the special figure 2 hold information setting process (step C187) that performs processing such as displaying the memory display, and the value of the special figure 2 hold number is not commanded ( In step C186; N), the process proceeds to step C188.

Proceeding to step C188, it is determined whether the MODE data is for notifying the power failure recovery (command data at the time of power failure recovery), and if it is for notifying the power failure recovery (step C188; Y), the power failure recovery setting. If the single-shot command process is terminated after the process (step C189) is executed and the power failure recovery is not notified (step C188; N), the process proceeds to step C190. The power failure recovery setting process (step C189) is for displaying a message such as "the game has resumed" on the display device 41, blinking the lamps in a predetermined mode, and notifying the player of the power failure recovery. This is the process of, and includes the scenario data setting process for that purpose.

Proceeding to step C190, it is determined whether the MODE data is for notifying the power-on (power-on with initialization) (command data at the time of power-on), and when the data is for notifying the power-on (step C190). In Y), the process proceeds to the power-on processing (step C191), and if it does not notify the power-on (step C190; N), the process proceeds to step C192. The power-on command is a power-on command that notifies the effect control device 300 that the game control device 100 has cleared the RWM. This power-on command is sent to cause the effect control device 300 to clear the effect state and to perform an RWM clear notification (an operation of displaying, for example, the display device 41 that the RWM has been cleared).

In the power-on processing (step C191), as various initial screen information settings, clear the special symbol type / symbol type, set 0 for the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number, and set the current symbol and the stop symbol. For example, a process of setting an outlier symbol of left = 7, middle = 5, and right = 3 is included. Further, an initialization process for setting the operating position of the motor of the effect device to the initial position and the like, and a control process for executing the RWM clear notification are included.

Proceeding to step C192, it is determined whether the MODE data informs the suggestion effect start condition. The suggestion effect start condition is the passage of the game ball through the normal drawing start gate 34 and the winning of the right general winning opening 35, which are the start conditions of the suggestion effect described later. In the game machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 and when the game ball enters the right general winning opening 35, the game control device 100 issues a suggestion effect start condition command. It is supposed to be sent.

When the MODE data informs the suggestion effect start condition (step C192; Y), the suggestion effect setting process (step C193) is performed, and the single-shot command process is terminated. The details of the suggestion effect setting process will be described later. If the suggestion effect start condition is not notified (step C192; N), processing for other commands (not shown) is performed, and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command process (step C101) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 35.
When the variable command processing is started, first, in step C111, it is determined whether the special figure type is undetermined, and if it is undetermined (step C111; Y), the variable command processing is terminated and it is not undetermined. In the case (step C111; N), that is, when the special symbol type is set, the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step C112) is executed to proceed to step C113. The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set by the symbol system command processing.

Proceeding to step C113, it is determined whether or not the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent based on the information (valid command information or invalid command information) returned in the variable pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step C112), and the result is inconsistent. If it is consistent (step C113; Y), that is, invalid command information is returned, the variable command processing is terminated and if it is not inconsistent (step C113; N), that is, valid command information is returned. If so, the process proceeds to step C114.
The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 16R probability variation jackpot symbol, and the like. Further, the inconsistency in step C113 is inconsistent in performing the production, such as when the deviation command (variation pattern command) is received but the symbol command of the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is received. It means that it is a combination (combination of variable command and symbol type).

Proceeding to step C114, in order to perform the effect according to the variation command, the variation effect setting process (step C114) is executed, and the changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko gaming machine state) (step C115). .. Here, "changing" means that the special figure is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). After that, a time limit management process for managing the time limit period for limiting the execution of the look-ahead effect described later is performed (step C116), and the variable command process is terminated.

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, the details of the variation effect setting process (step C114) in the variation system command process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the variation effect setting process is started, first, the variation pattern classification process (step C271) for selecting a rough classification pattern (rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure) according to the received command is executed, and the above A notice distribution table 1 corresponding to the roughly classified pattern returned in the variation pattern classification process of step C271 and various effect information is prepared (step C272). The effect information here is information on the stop symbol (especially because the details of the jackpot symbol and the loss can be understood by a large classification pattern), information on the probability state such as high probability / time saving state, the number of hold numbers, and the effect control device 300. There may be a game mode managed by (in this example, a game mode command is also sent from the game control device). Since the advance notice distribution table is set in consideration of various production information in this step C272 (or steps C274 and C277 described later), for example, even with the same fluctuation pattern command, the advance notice distribution rate (or the advance notice distribution rate (in the state at that time)) Incidence rate) can be changed.
Next, the random number lottery process A (step C273) is executed.
Next, the advance notice distribution table 2 corresponding to the major pattern and various production information returned in step C271 is prepared (step C274), the random number lottery process B (step C275) is executed, and the process proceeds to step C276. ..

When the process proceeds to step C276, it is determined whether the major pattern returned in step C271 is "normally out of order", and if it is "normally out of order" (step C276; Y), the process proceeds to step C279, and it must be "normally out of order". If (step C276; N), the process proceeds to step C277.
Proceeding to step C277, the advance notice distribution table 3 corresponding to the major pattern and various production information returned in step C271 is prepared (step C277), and the random number lottery process C (step C278) is executed. The process proceeds to step C279.
When the process proceeds to step C279, the basic BGM number (song number of the basic BGM) is set (step C279), the advance notice effect setting process 1 (step C280) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step C281.

When the process proceeds to step C281, it is determined whether or not the first half fluctuation type determined in the processes up to this point is normal fluctuation. If it is normal fluctuation (step C281; Y), the process proceeds to step C282, and if it is not normal fluctuation (step C281). C281; N), although not shown, various variation processing is performed when the first half variation type is not normal variation, and the variation effect setting process is terminated.
The first half variation type is a variation notice type that is distributed on the effect control device side in the same MODE (for example, 12 seconds first half normal variation). Further, "normal" in "normal fluctuation" means that it is not a special fluctuation such as so-called slip or shortened fluctuation. Further, in order to avoid complication, only a part of the advance notice distribution when the first half variation type is normal (not slip or shorten) is shown here.

Proceeding to step C282, it is determined whether the notice type (data in the effect distribution result area described later) determined in the processing up to this point (step C273, etc.) specifies the scroll notice, and if it is not the scroll notice (step). In C282; N), the process proceeds to step C283, and in the case of scroll advance notice (step C282; Y), the scroll advance notice scenario data setting process (step C286) is executed, and the variation effect setting process ends.
Proceeding to step C283, it is determined whether the notice type determined in the processing up to this point specifies the scroll character notice, and if it is the scroll character notice (step C283; Y), the scroll character notice scenario. The data setting process (step C287) is executed, and the variation effect setting process is completed. If it is not a scroll character notice (step C283; N), processing for other notices (not shown) is performed, and the variation effect setting process is terminated.

[Notice effect setting process 1]
Next, the details of the advance notice effect setting process 1 (step C280) in the above-mentioned variable effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. In this notice effect setting process 1, the step-up notice is set according to the random number lottery result (results of the above-mentioned random number lottery processes A, B, and C). The step-up notice is a notice effect in which the content of the notice changes step by step, and as the step progresses, the reliability, which is a high possibility of a special result, increases. In the drawings and specifications of the present application, "SU" means the step-up of this step-up notice, "SU1" means the first stage of the step-up notice, and "SU2" means the step-up notice. It means the second stage, and "SU3" means the third stage of the step-up notice.

When the advance notice effect setting process 1 is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the SU advance notice number area of the effect distribution result area (step C381).
Next, the scenario layer number 4 is prepared (step C382), the address of the SU notice scenario table corresponding to the number of SU notices loaded in step C381 is prepared (step C383), and the addresses are prepared in the immediately preceding steps C382 and C383. Based on the data, the scenario data setting process (step C384) for setting the progress of the effect is executed.

Next, the distribution result is loaded from the SU1 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area (step C385), the display image data corresponding to the SU1 cut-in number loaded in step C385 is acquired, and the motion index area (save the motion index). The data is saved in the SU1 cut-in area of the storage area (step C386).
Next, the distribution result is loaded from the SU2 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area (step C387), the display image data corresponding to the SU2 cut-in number loaded in step C387 is acquired, and the SU2 cut-in area of the motion index area is acquired. Save to (step C388).

Next, the distribution result is loaded from the SU3 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area (step C389), the display image data corresponding to the SU3 cut-in number loaded in step C389 is acquired, and the SU3 cut-in area of the motion index area is acquired. Save to (step C390) and proceed to step C391.
In steps C385 to C390, the data of the motion table for displaying the display image for each stage is temporarily saved. The data saved here is not always used, and when the number of selected SUs is 1 or 2, the display image saved in the upper SU area is not used.

In addition, a temporary image may be set as the display image. The temporary image is for arranging the temporary image so that the scenario of the production can be created even if the display image is not yet completed at the development stage of the game machine. When this temporary image is set (step C391; Y), the temporary image is replaced with the corresponding display image (step C392). However, when there is no display image to be replaced, such as in the development stage, the temporary image is not replaced and the effect is displayed as the temporary image. Whether or not the temporary image is set can be determined by the value of the image index, which is information that identifies the image in the display information area of the motion management area (see FIG. 33 (c)).

After that, the execution storage display setting process is performed (step C393). In this process, the display mode at the start of the display of the memory display during execution, the process of change, the change effect which is the effect accompanying the change, and the like are set. Details will be described later.

Next, the display on the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 38A, a decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 for displaying the first decorative game of the decorative special figure variable display games is provided in the center of the display area of the display device 41. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information.

Each identification information displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 includes a character unit 87a, a character unit 87b, and a decorative unit 87c attached to the character unit 87b. The character portion 87b is arranged so as to partially overlap the front side of the character portion 87a. In this embodiment, numbers are used as characters, and the character portion 87b can be said to be a number portion. Further, the decorative portion 87c is an image imitating a bell with a string attached, and is arranged so that one end of the string is connected to the character portion 87b. The decorative portion 87c is arranged so as to be located in the lower right front of the character portion 87b with the character portion 87b facing the front, and the character portion 87b rotates at the position of the decorative portion 87c as described later. It is a position that is not on the extension line of the rotation axis when displaying such a display.

A second decorative game display unit 88 for displaying the second decorative game among the decorative special figure variable display games is provided in the upper left portion of the display area. The second decorative game displayed on the second decorative game display unit 88 uses one fourth symbol in each of the left area corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the right area corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. It is intended to display the information that was used. In the 4th symbol, there are "-" which is the identification information corresponding to the deviation and "○" which is the identification information corresponding to the big hit, and after these are displayed in a variable manner, they are stopped and the result is displayed. There is.

Further, in the lower center of the display area, a standby storage display unit 83 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided. In the present embodiment, since the first start memory and the second start memory are digested in the order of memory, the standby memory display unit 83 has a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory or the second start memory on a one-to-one basis. Is displayed in the order of memory from the left end. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested.
In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode. In addition, in FIG. 38A, a look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is performed for the start memory in which the digestion order is the first.

On the left side of the standby storage display unit 83, an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. The decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84 at the start of the special figure variation display game, and the result or variation of the special figure variation display game to be executed. The pattern and the like are suggested by the display mode.
A start memory number display unit 86 for displaying the start memory number is provided in the upper right portion of the display area. The start memory number display unit 86 is provided with a first start memory number display unit 86a for displaying the number of first start memories and a second start memory number display unit 86b for displaying the number of second start memories. ing.

When the start memory is digested and decreased from the state shown in FIG. 38 (a), as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is being executed. Is displayed to flow into. Here, the execution memory display unit 84 also suggests the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like in the same manner as the look-ahead effect. Further, in the start storage number display unit 86, the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 86a is reduced by one.

Then, the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 starts the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory, and identifies each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas. The variable display of information is started. Further, the second decorative game display unit 88 also starts the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory, and the variable display of the identification information is started in the left area.
After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the identification information is temporarily stopped in the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 in the order of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area. In the temporarily stopped state, the character portion 87a, the character portion 87b, and the decoration portion 87c of the identification information are displayed so as to sway, indicating that the identification information is not completely stopped. Further, in the second decorative game display unit 88, the variable display of the identification information is continued in the left area.

Regarding the swaying motion at the time of temporary stop, the character portion 87a, the character portion 87b, and the decorative portion 87c may be swaying as one unit, or each of them may be swaying independently. In that case, it may sway in the same direction or in different directions. Further, a part of the character part 87a, the character part 87b, and the decoration part 87c may be stopped and the others may be operated so as to sway.

Then, when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 38D, the identification information of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85 is stopped, and the result mode is displayed. In the second decorative game display unit 88, the variation display of the identification information ends in the left area, the identification information is stopped, and the result mode is displayed.
Further, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop time. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the display of the running storage display unit 84 is erased, and the next decorative special figure variation display game can be started. If there is no start memory in the state of FIG. 38 (e), the customer is waiting. Further, if the result is a special result in the state of FIG. 38 (e), the special gaming state is set.

FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c) show an example of the step-up notice. When the step-up notice is given, after the variable display of the special figure fluctuation display game is started, the first stage SU1 is displayed as the step-up notice display image 600 as shown in FIG. 39 (a). It is said. Next, instead of the display of SU1, the display of SU2, which is the second stage, is performed as the display image 600 of the step-up notice as shown in FIG. 38 (b). Further, instead of the display of SU2, as shown in FIG. 38C, the display of SU3, which is the third stage, is performed as the display image 600 of the step-up notice.
If the progress stage of the step-up notice is one stage, the step-up notice ends when the display of FIG. 39 (a) ends. Further, when the progress stage of the step-up notice is two stages, the step-up notice ends when the display of FIG. 39B is completed.

The display image 600 of the step-up notice of the present embodiment is a layer 12 located on the front side of the screen from layers 5 to 7, which are layers on which the identification information of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is drawn (see FIG. 33). ), And the display image 600 of the step-up notice is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the identification information of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85.

39 (d) to (g) show an area 610 corresponding to the display area of the display device 41 in the layer 12 on which the display image of the step-up notice is drawn. The display image 600 of the step-up notice is composed of the background portion 601 and the character portion 602 and the character portion 603, but here, these are configured as one image in which they are integrated.
As described in the above-mentioned advance notice effect setting process 1, since the display image 600 to be used is always prepared for the display image 600 of SU1 and the display image 600 of SU2, the prepared display image is prepared at the execution timing. The 600 is drawn on the layer 12 as shown in FIGS. 39 (d) and 39 (e), and a step-up notice is given as shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b).

On the other hand, the display image of SU3 may be prepared with a temporary image 605, and when the temporary image 605 is prepared, it is drawn by replacing it with the display image 600 actually used. If there is a display image 600 to be replaced, or if the temporary image 605 is not prepared and the display image 600 is prepared from the beginning, the display image 600 of SU3 is drawn on the layer 12 as shown in FIG. 39 (f). , A step-up notice is given as shown in FIG. 39 (c). However, when there is no image to be replaced and the temporary image 605 is still prepared, the temporary image 605 is drawn on the layer 12 as shown in FIG. 39 (g). When the temporary image 605 is drawn, the temporary image 605 is displayed as the display image of SU3 as shown in FIG. 39 (h).

The temporary image 605 is not drawn on the entire area 610 corresponding to the display area on the layer 12, but is drawn only on the portion where the display image 600 of SU3 can be displayed. Therefore, even if the temporary image 605 is drawn, the image of the portion of the layer image located on the back side of the screen from the layer 12 on which the temporary image 605 is not drawn is visible.
By using such a temporary image 605, it is possible to proceed with the development related to the step-up notice even if the display image 600 has not been completed at the development stage, and the work can be performed in parallel. Efficiency can be increased.

Further, when the game machine is completed, the process of using the temporary image 605 becomes unnecessary, but even in this case, the process of preparing the temporary image 605 is left as it is without being deleted.
Even if the process of preparing the temporary image 605 is left, it is always replaced with the display image 600, so that no inconvenience occurs. Rather, it is possible to save the trouble of deleting the process of preparing the temporary image 605, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of unintended defects due to the deletion.

Although the use of the temporary image 605 is a part of the display image 600 of the SU3 having a plurality of types, the temporary image 605 may be used for all types of the display image 600 of the SU3, or there are a plurality of types. The temporary image 605 may also be used for a part or all of the display image 600 of SU1 and SU2.
Further, only a part of the display image 600 of the step-up notice may be used as the temporary image 605. As described above, the display image 600 of the step-up notice is composed of the background portion 601, the character portion 602, and the character portion 603, and a part of them may be a temporary image 605. In this case, a plurality of temporary images 605 may be included in one layer, and both the temporary image 605 and the completed image may be included in one layer.

Further, a plurality of temporary images 605 may be arranged on different layers. When a plurality of temporary images 605 are arranged on different layers, when the display image 600 of one step-up notice is an integrated image over a plurality of layers, the temporary images are used in the plurality of layers. There are cases. It is also conceivable that the temporary image 605 is used for the display image 600 of the step-up notice, and at the same time, the temporary image 605 is used for other displays.

In addition, the use of the temporary image 605 is not limited to the step-up notice, and can be used in other effects. Regarding the effect of displaying some image, the temporary image 605 is used for the effect for which the displayed image has not been completed yet. By doing so, it is possible to proceed with the design of the processing related to the production even before all the displayed images are completed.
For example, the temporary image 605 may be used for a part or all of the images of the effect selected and displayed from the plurality of images. In addition, a notice to display lines, a character display to explain the function of the game machine, a display for error notification, a cut-in notice, a background display, a selection display of music and production contents during a special game state, a game machine Efficient development of these displays by using temporary images 605 for history display, eye-catching images displayed at the time of scene change, chance-up images displayed with a predetermined probability during SP reach, etc. You can proceed.

In addition, the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display unit 83, the running memory display of the running memory display unit 84, the change effect displayed when changing the decorative special figure start memory display or the running memory display, and the start Temporary image 605 may be used for the first start storage number display unit 86a and the second start storage number display unit 86b of the storage number display unit 86. In this case, when a plurality of display images are prepared for the look-ahead effect, the provisional image 605 may be used for a part or all of them.
Further, the temporary image 605 may be used for the identification information displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the identification information displayed on the second decorative game display unit 88. In this case, the temporary image 605 may be used for a part or all of the plurality of types of identification information. Further, the temporary image 605 may be used for a part or all of the character portion 87a, the character portion 87b, and the decorative portion 87c included in the identification information.

On the contrary, an effect may be defined so as not to use the temporary image 605. Use the temporary image 605 for images that may be disadvantageous to the player if the temporary image 605 is displayed as it is, such as a warning image that calls attention to the player, an error notification, and a notification of the firing direction. You may not do it.
Further, the temporary image 605 may not be used for an image that is important for the player, such as a definite display of a big hit or an image showing a special result, which would significantly reduce the interest if displayed as the temporary image 605. ..

Further, the temporary image 605 is an image having a size drawn only in a portion where the replacement display image can be displayed, but the data of the temporary image is drawn only in the portion where the replacement display image can be displayed. An image larger than the size may be prepared as temporary image data, which may be reduced and used as the temporary image 605.
On the contrary, an image smaller than the size drawn only in the portion where the replacement display image can be displayed may be prepared as the data of the temporary image, and this may be enlarged and used as the temporary image 605.
By doing so, even if the occupied area of the display image to be replaced at the development stage changes, it can be dealt with simply by changing the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio of the temporary image without changing the temporary image data, and the development efficiency. Can be enhanced.

Further, although the temporary image 605 is a monochromatic image, it may be an image other than this.
For example, an image such as a rough sketch corresponding to the display image 600 may be used as a temporary image as shown in FIG. 40 (a), or the content of the display image 600 may be described in characters as shown in FIG. 40 (b). The image may be a temporary image 605. By doing so, the content of the display image 600 can be easily grasped at the development stage, and the efficiency of development can be improved.
Further, the temporary image 605 may be an image that can be used as an effect display such as the display of the cherry blossom pattern shown in FIG. 40 (c). Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (d), an image that is used only as a temporary image 605 but has the same display content as the actually used display image may be used. By doing so, even if the temporary image 605 is displayed due to a defect or the like, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, it is possible to use a plurality of types of temporary images 605 such as an image that can be used as an effect as shown in FIGS. 40 (c) and 40 (d) and a monochromatic image as shown in FIG. 39, and the position to be used and the position to be used. It may be possible to select which temporary image 605 is used according to the scene.
Further, the type of the provisional image 605 may be different for each model of different models of gaming machines that have different specifications such as jackpot probability but can execute the same effect. By doing so, the model can be easily grasped from the temporary image 605, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (e), the temporary image 605 may be regarded as a transparent image so that the image of the rear layer can be seen through. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp the positional relationship with the image of the rear layer at the development stage, and the efficiency of development can be improved.
Further, the pattern of the background image and the pattern of the temporary image 605 drawn on the entire screen on the back side of the screen from the layer 0 located at the innermost part of the screen may be the same pattern. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data of the background image and divert it as the data of the temporary image 605.

Further, in the image ROM 325 in which image or video data is stored, an area for storing temporary image data and an area for storing display image data which is other image or video data are separated. Is also good. By doing so, it becomes easy to handle in the process of development, and the efficiency of development can be improved.
Further, the area for storing the temporary image data may be an area on the front side or an area on the rear side of the area where the display image data is stored. By storing in the area on the front side of the display image data, the position of the area for storing the temporary image data does not change even if the size of the display image data area changes during the development process. it can.
In addition, even if it is stored in the area behind the display image data, it can be developed by securing an unused area in advance and arranging it in a position where it is clear that the display image data will not be stored. Even if the size of the display image data area changes in the process of, the position of the area for storing the temporary image data can be prevented from changing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the image ROM 325 is arranged at the beginning of an area for storing data used for a game, and display image data which is data of other images or videos is stored in the area after that. You may try to do it. Since the temporary image data is used at the development stage and the display image is also predetermined, the data can be prepared from the beginning of development, and it is easy to store the data from the beginning of the storage area. Is. In addition, by storing from the beginning of the storage area, the storage position of the temporary image does not change even if the display image data increases or decreases, and there is no need to change the area referenced on the program side, which improves development efficiency. it can.
Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), an unused area may be arranged in an area on the leading side of the area for storing temporary image data, or an area for storing as shown in FIG. 40 (c). An area for storing fixed data whose size does not change may be arranged. In this case as well, the position of the area for storing the temporary image data can be prevented from changing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (d), the image ROM 325 may be arranged at the end of the area for storing the data used for the game. Even in this way, the same effect as when arranging at the beginning can be obtained.
Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (e), an unused area may be arranged in an area behind the area for storing the temporary image data, or an area for storing as shown in FIG. 41 (f). An area for storing fixed data or the like whose size does not change may be arranged. In this case as well, the position of the area for storing the temporary image data can be prevented from changing.
Further, the data of the temporary image may be stored adjacent to the display image data that can be replaced with the data of the temporary image. By doing so, the corresponding display image data becomes easy to understand.

From the above, a display device 41 that displays an image on a game machine that can generate an advantageous state for the player when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. And an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the display device 41, and the effect control means displays an image to be displayed on the display device 41 by integrating a plurality of layers on which an image can be drawn. It is configured to be generated, and a part of the drawing area of a predetermined layer can be drawn using a specific image (temporary image 605), and when drawn using the specific image, the specific image is drawn. It is replaced with a predetermined image and displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, even if the image to be displayed is not completed, the development can be advanced using the temporary image 605, and the efficiency of the development can be improved.

Further, the effect control means makes it possible to visually recognize the image of the layer arranged on the back side of the predetermined layer in the area where the image is not drawn in the predetermined layer including the specific image. Therefore, even when the temporary image 605 is displayed, it is possible to display the same as the actual effect, and the development can be efficiently advanced.

Further, the effect control means can draw an image including a plurality of specific images on a predetermined layer. Therefore, it is possible to create an image of each part separately, and the development can be efficiently advanced.

Next, the effect executed based on the detection of the game ball in the predetermined area will be described.
In the game machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the first suggestion effect that suggests the probability set value based on the detection of the game ball at the normal drawing start gate 34 forming the first detection unit. In addition, it is possible to execute a second suggestion effect that suggests a probability set value based on the detection of the game ball at the right general winning opening 35 that forms the second detection unit located below the normal drawing start gate 34.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the passing rate of the game ball to the normal drawing start gate 34 is 20% of the right-handed game balls. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 2, only a part of the game balls that have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 due to a plurality of obstacle nails can flow into the right general winning opening 35 provided below the normal drawing start gate 34. At the same time, game balls that have not passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 are prevented from flowing into the right general winning opening 35, and the winning rate to the right general winning opening 35 is that of the right-handed game ball. It is 5% of them. That is, 25% of the game balls that have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 win the right general winning opening 35. Therefore, when the second suggestion effect is executed, the first suggestion effect is also executed, so that the accuracy of the suggestion can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

The passing rate of the game ball to the normal drawing start gate 34 and the winning rate to the right general winning opening 35 can be arbitrarily set, and the passing rate of the right-handed game ball to the normal drawing starting gate 34 is higher. , It is good if it is higher than the winning rate of the right-handed game ball to the right general winning opening 35. Further, a game ball that does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 may be able to win a prize in the right general winning opening 35.

FIG. 42B shows a first suggestion effect selection table used for selecting the first suggestion effect. There are three modes of execution of the effect, the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C, and here, the light emitting mode in the first display unit 621 is different. Further, FIG. 42 (c) shows a second suggestion effect selection table used for selecting the selection of the second suggestion effect. There are three modes of execution of the effect, the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C, and here, the light emitting mode in the second display unit 622 is different.
Among these effect modes, the effect mode A suggests that the setting 1 has the lowest probability of producing a special result, and the effect mode B is a setting 2 having a medium probability of producing a special result. This suggests that the effect mode C is the setting 3 having the highest probability of producing a special result.

As for the execution modes of the effect modes A to C, for example, the effect mode A has a blue emission color and the effect mode B has a green emission color in both the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect. The effect mode C is a red emission color. Of course, the execution modes of the production modes A to C are not limited to this, and the execution modes of the production modes A to C may be different between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect. Examples of the execution mode include emission color, blinking cycle, emission intensity, and the like, which can be arbitrarily set.

Further, in the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the selection ratio of the effect mode C to the selection ratio of the effect mode A when the setting 1 having the lowest probability of producing a special result is set is the first suggestion effect. The second suggestion production is lower than that.
Further, when the setting 3 having the highest probability of obtaining a special result is set, the selection ratio of the production mode C to the selection ratio of the production mode A is higher in the second suggestion effect than in the first suggestion effect. There is.
Further, when the setting 2 having a medium probability of obtaining a special result is set, the selection ratio of the production mode B to the selection ratio of the production mode A is higher in the second suggestion effect than in the first suggestion effect. ing.
Further, when the setting 2 having a medium probability of obtaining a special result is set, the selection ratio of the production mode B to the selection ratio of the production mode C is higher in the second suggestion effect than in the first suggestion effect. ing.

That is, it is less likely that the second suggestion effect is executed than the first suggestion effect, but the accuracy of the suggestion of the probability set value is higher in the second suggestion effect than in the first suggestion effect. ing. By configuring in this way, since the first suggestion effect is executed with high frequency, it is possible to increase the interest in executing the suggestion of the probability set value and prevent the probability set value from being easily found. Although the production is infrequent, the accuracy of the suggestion is high, and when it is executed, the player's interest can be enhanced. By making such suggestion effects with different personalities feasible, it is possible to make suggestions that have never existed before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The selection ratio of the effects shown in FIGS. 42 (b) and 42 (c) is not limited to this, and the accuracy of the suggestion of the probability set value is higher in the second suggestion effect than in the first suggestion effect. Any value may be used as long as it is used.

[Suggestion effect setting process]
FIG. 43 shows the suggestion effect setting process performed in the one-shot command process (see FIG. 34). In this suggestion effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step C401), and if the game ball has not passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step C401; N), , Step C405.
Further, in the case where the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step C401; Y), the first suggestion effect selection table (see FIG. 42B) is set (step C402), and the first suggestion is made. The effect selection process based on the effect selection table is performed (step C403). Then, the selected first suggestion effect is set (step C404), and the process proceeds to step C405. As a result, the first suggestion effect is performed on the first display unit 621 in the selected effect mode.

In step C405, it is determined whether or not the right general winning opening 35 has been won (step C405), and if the right general winning opening 35 has not been won (step C405; N), the suggestion effect setting process is terminated.
Further, in the case of winning the right general winning opening 35 (step C405; Y), the second suggestion effect selection table (see FIG. 42 (c)) is set (step C406), and the second suggestion effect selection table is set. The effect selection process based on the above is performed (step C407). Then, the selected second suggestion effect is set (step C408), and the suggestion effect setting process is terminated. As a result, the second suggestion effect is performed on the second display unit 622 in the selected effect mode.

It should be noted that the suggestion effect may be executed with a predetermined probability when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 or when the right side general winning opening 35 is won. For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), among the cases where the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34, the first suggestion effect is executed with the first execution probability of 40%, and the right side is general. Of the cases where the winning opening 35 is won, the second suggestion effect may be executed with a second execution probability of 20%.

In this case, in the above-mentioned suggestion effect setting process, the lottery is performed with the first execution probability when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step C401; Y), and when the game is won, the lottery is performed from step C402. The processing of C404 is performed.
Further, if the prize is won in the right general winning opening 35 (step C405; Y), the lottery is performed with the second execution probability, and if the prize is won, the processes of steps C406 to C408 are performed.

By doing so, in addition to the physical limitation of winning by the obstacle nail, the execution probability of each can be controlled, and the interest in the execution of the suggestion effect can be enhanced. Further, the first execution probability and the second execution probability may be changed when a predetermined condition in the game is satisfied, such as during a specific game state or a period during which a specific effect is executed. Specific game states include a game state which is a normal probability state, a game state which is a high probability state, a game state which is a time saving state, a special game state, and the like, and one or more of these game states are associated with each other. It is possible. In addition, examples of the specific effect include a state in which a predetermined effect is executed, a state in which a predetermined effect mode is set, and the like other than the reach state, the SP reach state, and the reach state, and one or more of them. It is possible to correspond to the production of. In addition to this, predetermined conditions for changing the execution probability include the occurrence of a big hit, the number of start-up memories being a predetermined number, the operation of the effect button 25, the predetermined time, and the like. It is possible to correspond multiple conditions.

In addition to changing the execution frequency of the suggestion effect by setting the first execution probability and the second execution probability, the execution frequency of the suggestion effect is changed by changing the ease with which the execution condition of the suggestion effect is satisfied. You may let it.
For example, the execution condition of the suggestion effect is satisfied every time the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34, and the suggestion effect is executed every time two or more game balls pass through the normal figure start gate 34. Even if the execution frequency is changed by selecting the case where the condition is satisfied and the case where the predetermined condition in the game is satisfied, such as during a specific game state or a period during which a specific effect is executed. good.

It should be noted that the execution timing of the suggestion effect is immediately based on the passage of the game ball to the normal figure start gate 34 and the winning of the right general winning opening 35, but the passage of the game ball to the normal figure start gate 34. Or, the right to execute the suggestion effect may be stocked based on the winning of the right general winning opening 35, and the suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined timing later. In this case, the standby notification display 631 as described later may be performed to notify that the suggestion effect is waiting to be executed. Further, the standby notification display 631 may suggest or notify the content of the suggestion effect. Further, in the standby notification display 631, a suggestion effect may be performed separately from the suggestion effect waiting for execution. In this case, the accuracy of the suggestion may be different between the suggestion effect on the standby notification display 631 corresponding to the first suggestion effect and the suggestion effect on the standby notification display 631 corresponding to the second suggestion effect.

In addition, one of the passing of the game ball to the normal drawing start gate 34 and the winning of the right general winning opening 35 immediately performs the suggestion effect, and the other stocks the right to execute the suggestion effect and performs it at a later timing. You may. In particular, by stocking the right to execute the suggestion effect for the suggestion effect with higher accuracy of the suggestion and performing it at a later timing, the player can see the suggestion effect more reliably, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

In addition, the passage of the game ball to the starting gate 34 and the winning of the general winning opening 35 on the right side were the triggers for executing the suggestion effect, but the suggestion effect can be executed based on the detection of the game ball in other places. Is also good. For example, detection of a game ball at the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, and the left general winning opening 35, and an effect provided separately from these winning openings. It may be possible to execute the suggestion effect by detecting the game ball in the detection unit of the game ball for use, and it can be set arbitrarily.
Further, as an opportunity other than the passage of the game ball, the suggestion effect may be performed when the game state changes such as the end of the special game state. In this case, the accuracy of the suggestion may be different depending on the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probabilistic jackpot, etc.) that triggered the execution of the special game state.

Further, the suggestion effect may be any kind, and may be displayed on the display device 41 in addition to the one performed by the first display unit 621 and the second display unit 622. For example, a predetermined display area of the display device 41 may be a first display unit 621 or a second display unit 622, and the production modes A to C may be expressed by the display color and the type of character in this display area. .. Further, the production modes A to C may be expressed by voice.

In addition, when the display device 41 notifies the number of prize balls generated due to winning, the production modes A to C are expressed by the notification mode of the number of prize balls accompanying the winning to the right general winning opening 35, which triggers the suggestion effect. It may be something to do.
For example, the display color of the notification of the number of prize balls accompanying the winning of the right general winning opening 35 is made different in the production modes A to C. In this case, the display color is different from the display color for notifying the number of prize balls accompanying the winning of the winning opening, which does not trigger the suggestion effect.
Such notification of the number of prize balls may be performed at all times, or may be performed only in a game state in which the number of balls held by the player increases, such as a special game state or a game state in which small hits occur frequently. ..
In addition, the execution location of the suggestion effect may be different depending on the game state or the like. For example, in the case of a short time state, the player pays attention to the passage of the game ball to the normal drawing start gate 34, so the suggestion effect is executed on the first display unit 621 and the second display unit 622, and the game is played in the special game state. Since the person pays attention to the display device 41, the suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41.

In addition, when a prize is given to a winning opening whose ease of winning changes depending on the game state, such as the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning device 38, the suggestion effect is given by the state of the ease of winning. The accuracy of the may be different. For example, in the case of winning in a state where it is difficult to win, the accuracy of the suggestion effect should be higher than in the case of winning in a state where winning is easy.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with a storage means for storing the content and the number of times of the suggestion effect executed by the first display unit 621 and the second display unit 622, and is stored in an external terminal by displaying a two-dimensional code or the like. An output means for outputting the information may be provided so that the content and number of suggestions by the suggestion effect can be confirmed on an external terminal.

Further, the target of the suggestion is not limited to the probability set value, and any suggestion regarding the game may be used. For example, it may indicate the fluctuation pattern (type of SP reach, etc.) of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed and the high possibility of a special result. For example, it may be suggested that the effect mode A is the least likely to have a special result, and that the effect modes B and C are most likely to be a special result.

Further, the start memory may be a look-ahead effect that suggests a variation pattern (type of SP reach, etc.) of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory and a high possibility of a special result. For example, regarding the high possibility that the start memory having a special result exists in the start memory, it is assumed that the effect mode A is the least likely to exist, and the effect modes B and C may exist in this order. May suggest that is high. In addition, it may be an effect that suggests whether it is a normal probability state or a high probability state. Further, it may be an effect that suggests the probability currently set in the latent state that does not clearly notify which of the normal probability state and the high probability state.

Further, the target of the suggestion is not limited to the probability setting value, and any setting value that can be selected and set from a plurality of types of setting values by the operation of the player or the clerk of the game store may be used. For example, the volume, the set value of the brightness of the display device 41, the type of the selected effect mode, and the like may be used.

Further, in the game machine of the present embodiment, only the right-handed game ball can be detected by the normal drawing start gate 34 and the right general winning opening 35, but in such a configuration of the game board 30, the game proceeds by left-handed. If a game ball is detected at the normal drawing start gate 34 or the right general winning opening 35 in the state of being in the state of being, the suggestion effect may not be performed. In addition, if it is designed to perform a suggestion effect triggered by the detection of the game ball by the detection unit that can detect only the left-handed game ball, it is suggested when the game ball is detected in the state where the game is progressing by right-handed. You may not perform the production.
That is, when a game ball that triggers the execution of the suggestion effect is detected, whether or not the suggestion effect is executed depends on whether the game is progressing by hitting the left side or the game by hitting the right side. May be determined, or the accuracy of the suggestion effect may be different.

Further, the presence / absence and accuracy of execution of the suggestion effect may be selected depending on the game state. For example, suggestion effect depending on which of the game states such as the normal probability state, the high probability state, the special game state, the time saving state, the normal probability state and not the time saving state, the customer waiting state, and the plurality of effect modes. You may choose whether or not to execute and the accuracy.

Further, when the presence / absence and accuracy of the suggestion effect are different depending on the game state, it may be treated according to the game state before the change in the predetermined period after the change of the game state occurs. ..
For example, when the game changes from a state in which the game progresses by hitting right to a state in which the game progresses by hitting left due to a change in the game state, a suggestion effect is produced in a state where the game progresses by hitting right for a certain period from the change in the game state. It may be treated in the same manner as when the execution opportunity is established. For a certain period of time from the change of the game state to the state where the game progresses by hitting left, there is already a game ball launched by hitting right, so for such a game ball, the opportunity to execute the suggestion effect is established by hitting right. It can be treated fairly by treating it in the same way as when it is done. Of course, even if the state changes from the state where the game is progressed by left-handed to the state where the game is progressed by right-handed, the same treatment as when the execution opportunity of the suggestion effect is established while the game is progressed by left-handed for a certain period of time. You may try to.

Similarly, in the case of a change in the gaming state in which the firing direction does not change, the presence / absence and accuracy of the suggestion effect are set according to the gaming state before the change in the predetermined period after the change in the gaming state occurs. You may do so. For example, when the presence / absence and accuracy of suggestion effect execution are specified in the normal game state, the special game state, and the time saving state, a special result occurs in the normal game state in which the game progresses by left-handed, and the right-handed state. When the special game state in which the game progresses is started and then the time is shortened in which the game progresses by right-handed, the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is in the special game state or the normal game state for a certain period from the end of the special game state. It may be treated in the same way as when it is established. In this case, the fixed period may be until all the start memories of the first special figure variation display game that existed at the end of the special gaming state are exhausted.

Further, even in the same gaming state, the presence or absence of execution of the suggestion effect and the accuracy may be different depending on factors other than the change in the gaming state.
For example, in the normal game state or the time saving state, the timing of establishing the execution trigger of the suggestion effect is the case where the special figure variation display game is being executed and the special figure variation display in two consecutively executed special figure variation display games. Whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the accuracy may be different depending on the case where the inter-game timing is the timing between the end of the game and the start of the next special figure variation display game.

For example, if the execution trigger of the suggestion effect is established during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the accuracy of the suggestion is higher than the case where the execution trigger of the suggestion effect is established at the inter-game timing. It is possible to change the game and improve the fun of the game. In addition, if the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the accuracy of the suggestion is lower than the case where the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established at the inter-game timing. It is possible to give the player a privilege that the highly accurate suggestion effect is executed only when the execution opportunity of the suggestion effect can be established at the inter-game timing, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

In addition, the execution of the suggestion effect is performed according to whether or not the running special figure variation display game is in reach, whether or not the stop display is in progress, the type of reach being executed, the type of effect being executed, and the like. The presence / absence and accuracy may be different.
For example, if the timing at which the execution trigger of the suggestion effect is established is set to be higher in the case where the suggestion is in the reach than in the case where the suggestion is not in the reach, the accuracy of the suggestion is improved in addition to the improvement of the interest by the reach. It can be expected that the interest will be improved. In addition, if the accuracy of the suggestion is lower when the timing when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established is lower than when it is not in the reach, it is not necessary to pay attention to the suggestion effect during the reach. , The player's consciousness can be directed toward the reach production, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, if the timing at which the execution trigger of the suggestion effect is established is set to be higher in the case where the stop display is displayed than in the case where the stop display is not displayed, the suggestion is made in addition to the improvement of the interest by displaying the result. It can be expected to improve the interest by improving the accuracy of. In addition, if the accuracy of the suggestion is lower when the timing at which the execution trigger of the suggestion effect is established is in the stop display than when the stop display is not displayed, the game is played against the confirmation of the result rather than the suggestion effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by directing the consciousness of the person.

In addition, if the accuracy of the suggestion is higher when the timing when the execution trigger of the suggestion effect is established is higher than when the stop display is being displayed, the accuracy of the suggestion is improved in addition to the improvement of the interest by the reach. It can be expected that the interest will be improved by improving In addition, if the accuracy of the suggestion is lower when the timing at which the execution trigger of the suggestion effect is established is in the reach than when the stop display is in progress, the suggestion effect does not need to be watched during the reach. It can be improved and the player's consciousness can be directed toward the reach production, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, if the accuracy of the suggestion is increased so that the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established in the reach with high expectation as a special result, the accuracy of the suggestion will be improved in addition to the improvement of the interest by the reach with high expectation. It can be expected to improve the interest. In addition, by making the suggestion accuracy lower as the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established in the reach with high expectation, it is not necessary to pay attention to the suggestion effect during the reach, and the player's consciousness is reached. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by being able to turn to.

Further, in the special game state, the presence / absence and accuracy of the suggestion effect may be different depending on whether it is a fanfare, a round, an interval, or an ending.
For example, if the suggestion effect is not executed during the fanfare, the player can concentrate on preparations such as changing the firing direction toward the start of the special game state. In addition, if the suggestion effect is not executed during the interval, the player concentrates on these notifications when the player is notified such as the number of acquired balls and the execution mode of the next round during the interval. You will be able to do it.
In addition, the accuracy of the suggestion is increased in the order of fanfare, round, interval, and ending when the timing of the execution of the suggestion effect is established, so that the accuracy of the suggestion is improved toward the end of the special game state. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game after the end of the game state.
In addition, the timing at which the execution opportunity of the suggestion effect is established is such that the accuracy of the suggestion becomes lower in the order of fanfare, round, interval, and ending, so that the accuracy becomes the highest at the start of the special game state, and the special game You can have a sense of expectation at the beginning of the state.

In addition, the presence / absence and accuracy of the suggestion effect may be different depending on the type of special result that triggered the occurrence of the special gaming state. For example, the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot may be different in the presence / absence and accuracy of the suggestion effect in the subsequent special game state.
If the accuracy of the suggestion is higher when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established in the special game state based on the probability variation jackpot than when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established in the special game state based on the normal jackpot. In addition to improving the interest by becoming a high-probability state after the end of the special game state, it can be expected that the interest will be improved by improving the accuracy of the suggestion.
In addition, the accuracy of the suggestion should be lower when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established in the special game state based on the probability variation jackpot than when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established in the special game state based on the normal jackpot. For example, it is possible to suppress the disappointment caused by the normal probability state after the end of the special game state and to give the motivation to continue the game.

In addition, when the execution opportunity of the suggestion effect is established in the state where there is no start memory and the special figure variation display game is not executed in the time saving state, the suggestion effect is performed in the state where the special figure variation display game is executed in the time saving state. The accuracy of the suggestion may be higher than when the execution opportunity of is established. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the special figure variation display game is not executed.
In addition, when the execution opportunity of the suggestion effect is established in the state where there is no start memory and the special figure variation display game is not executed in the time saving state, the suggestion effect is performed in the state where the special figure variation display game is executed in the time saving state. The accuracy of the suggestion may be lower than when the execution opportunity of is established. By doing so, the player's consciousness can be directed to the generation of the starting memory.
Further, in the state where there is no start memory and the special figure variation display game is not executed in the time saving state, the suggestion effect may not be executed even if the execution opportunity of the suggestion effect is established. By doing so, the player's consciousness can be directed to the generation of the starting memory.

In addition, when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established during the round in the special game state, the accuracy of the suggestion is higher than when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established while the special figure variation display game is being executed in the time saving state. May be higher. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the special game state, which is often shorter than the time saving state.
In addition, when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established during the round in the special game state, the accuracy of the suggestion is higher than when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established while the special figure variation display game is being executed in the time saving state. May be low. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for a long period of time by enhancing the interest of the game in the time-saving state where the period is longer than that of the special game state.

In addition, when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established during the ending in the special game state, the accuracy of the suggestion is higher than when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established while the special figure variation display game is being executed in the time saving state. May be higher. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the special game state, which is often shorter than the time saving state.
In addition, when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established during the ending in the special game state, the accuracy of the suggestion is higher than when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established while the special figure variation display game is being executed in the time saving state. May be low. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for a long period of time by enhancing the interest of the game in the time-saving state where the period is longer than that of the special game state.

In addition, when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established during the ending in the special game state, it is more suggestive than when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established in the result period for notifying the number of acquired game balls at the end of the time saving state. The accuracy of the may be increased. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the special game state.
In addition, when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established during the ending in the special game state, it is more suggestive than when the trigger for executing the suggestion effect is established in the result period for notifying the number of acquired game balls at the end of the time saving state. The accuracy of the may be reduced. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the result period executed immediately before the transition to the normal game state, and to give the motivation to continue the game even in the normal game state.

By setting the presence / absence and accuracy of the suggestion effect in consideration of various conditions as described above, the suggestion effect can be made various.
In addition, each of the above examples can be arbitrarily combined, and the suggestion effect can be made more diverse.
In addition, the presence or absence of execution of the suggestion effect can be said to be the presence or absence of restrictions on the execution of the suggestion effect. In addition to the case where the execution of the suggestion effect is not selected from the beginning, the case where the execution of the suggestion effect is once selected but the execution is restricted due to the satisfaction of the condition is also included.

From the above, an effect of controlling the production of a game in a game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. A control means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the effect control means can execute a first suggestion effect and a second suggestion effect as suggestion effects for suggesting matters related to the game, and is based on the second suggestion effect. The accuracy of the suggestion is higher than the accuracy of the suggestion by the first suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect having a different taste, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided with a setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting a set value selected from a plurality of types of set values including the first set value by a predetermined operation. Is configured to suggest the set set value as a matter related to the game by the suggestion effect, and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect include the first effect mode (any of the effect modes A to C) and A second effect mode (any of the effect modes A to C) is included, which suggests that the first set value (for example, any of settings 1 to 3) is more likely to be set than the first effect mode. The selection ratio of the second effect mode to the selection ratio of the first effect mode when the first set value is set is higher in the second suggestion effect than in the first suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect having different suggestion accuracy, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a setting means (setting means) that enables selection of a probability setting value to which a probability value that is a special result in a game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating an operation unit (setting value change switch 151, setting key switch 152). The game control device 100) is provided, and the effect control means is configured to suggest the set probability set value as a matter related to the game by the suggestion effect, and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect include the first effect mode. (Production mode A) and a second production mode (Production mode C) suggesting that a probability setting value that is more likely to result in a special result than the first production mode is set, and the probability of a special result is included. When the highest probability setting value is set, the selection ratio of the second production mode to the selection ratio of the first production mode is higher in the second suggestion effect than in the first suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect having different suggestion accuracy, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a setting means capable of selecting a probability setting value to which a probability value that is a special result in a game is assigned from a plurality of types of the probability setting values by operating an operation unit (setting value change switch 151, setting key switch 152). (Game control device 100) is provided, and the effect control means is configured to suggest a set probability set value as a matter related to the game by a suggestion effect, and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect include a first effect. A mode (effect mode A) and a second effect mode (effect mode C) suggesting that a probability setting value having a higher probability of producing a special result than the first effect mode is set are included, and the special result is obtained. When the probability setting value having the lowest probability is set, the selection ratio of the second effect mode to the selection rate of the first effect mode is lower in the second suggestion effect than in the first suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect having different suggestion accuracy, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control means can execute the first suggestion effect with the first execution probability and can execute the second suggestion effect with a second execution probability lower than the first execution probability. Therefore, suggestion effects with different suggestion accuracy can be executed with different execution probabilities, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, by lowering the execution probability of the highly accurate suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being found at an early stage.

Further, in the game area 32 where the game ball can flow down, a first detection unit (general drawing start gate 34) and a second detection unit (right side general winning opening 35) capable of detecting the passage of the game ball are provided, and the effect control means. Is able to execute the first suggestion effect based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection unit, and can execute the second suggestion effect based on the detection of the game ball by the second detection unit. Therefore, the detection of the game ball by the detection unit used for the game also serves as an opportunity to execute the effect, and the detection unit can be provided with a new function to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second detection unit can pass only a part of the game ball detected by the first detection unit. Therefore, when the second suggestion effect is executed, the first suggestion effect is also performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the look-ahead effect after the power failure is restored will be described. FIG. 44 shows an example of the progress of the game.
In this example, first, the special figure variation display game is executed in a state where there are three start memories a to c. In the column of the number of start-up memories in FIG. 44, the number of start-up memories is shown in the upper row by a number, and the type of start-up memory existing in the lower row is shown.

A power failure occurred in this state (t11), and then the power failure was restored (t12). Since the game control device 100 has a backup function, the state at the time of the power failure is backed up with the occurrence of the power failure. Therefore, the information managed by the game control device 100 is maintained in the state at the time of the power failure, and the continuation of the special figure variation display game is restarted from the state at the time of the power failure with the recovery of the power failure and started. The states of the memories a to c before the power failure are maintained.

When the special figure variation display game executed with the power failure is completed, the start memory a is digested and the special figure variation display game a based on the start memory a is started (t13). Further, when the game a ends, the start memory b is digested and the game b, which is a special figure variation display game based on the start memory b, is started (t14).
During the execution of this game b, two new start memories d and start memory e are generated, and the number of start memories is 3 (t15, t16). These start memory d and start memory e form a specific start memory which is a start memory generated after the power failure is restored.

After that, when the game b ends, the start memory c is digested and the game c, which is a special figure variation display game based on the start memory c, is started (t17). Further, when the game c ends, the start memory d is digested and the game d, which is a special figure variation display game based on the start memory d, is started (t18), and when the game d ends, the start memory e is digested. The game e, which is a special figure variation display game based on the start memory e, is started (t19).

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the period from the recovery of the power failure to the end of all the special figure variation display games based on the start memory that existed before the power failure is limited to the execution of the look-ahead effect. I am trying to. In the example of FIG. 44, the period (t12 to t18) from the recovery of the power failure to the end of the game c is the limiting period.

Since the effect control device 300 does not have a backup function, the information of the special figure variation display game being executed and the information of the start memory are lost due to the occurrence of a power failure. That is, the look-ahead information about the start memories a to c that existed before the occurrence of the power failure is lost due to the power failure, and the look-ahead effect for these start memories a to c cannot be executed after the power failure is restored.
Further, regarding the start memories d and e generated after the power failure is restored, the look-ahead information is received when the start memory is generated and the look-ahead effect can be executed, but the look-ahead information about the start memories a to c is lost. Since it is not known what kind of special figure variation display game will be executed before the special figure variation display game based on the start memory d and e is executed, and whether there is a change in the gaming state, etc. There is a risk of inconsistency when performing the production.
Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted for the period from the recovery of the power failure to the end of all the special figure fluctuation display games based on the start memory that existed before the power failure.

[Limited period setting process]
FIG. 45 shows a time limit setting process performed in the power failure recovery process (step C189) of the single-shot command process (see FIG. 34). In this limit period setting process, first, the limit flag is set (step C421). When this restriction flag is set, the look-ahead effect is not set in the look-ahead variable command process (see FIG. 32) for setting the look-ahead effect.
Then, the value of the start memory number + 1 is set as the limit number of times (step C422), and the limit period setting process is completed. The limit number of times is for managing the period of the limit period, and is subtracted at the start of the special figure variation display game.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
FIG. 46 shows a look-ahead symbol-based command process (step C244) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this look-ahead symbol-based command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301). When the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, when the received look-ahead symbol system command is related to the special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. FIG. 1 Saves in the look-ahead symbol command area (step C302), sets the look-ahead variation command reception waiting flag (step C304), and ends the look-ahead symbol command processing.

Further, when the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, when the received look-ahead symbol system command is related to the special figure 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. Special figure 2 Save in the look-ahead symbol command area (step C303), set the look-ahead variation command reception waiting flag (step C304), and end the look-ahead symbol command processing. The read-ahead variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
FIG. 47 shows the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this look-ahead variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead variation command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, when there is a look-ahead variation command reception waiting flag set in the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol system command processing, it is determined that the command is waiting for reception. If the read-ahead variation command is not waiting for reception (step C311; N), the look-ahead variation command processing ends. On the other hand, when waiting for the look-ahead variation command reception (step C311; Y), the look-ahead variation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C312).

After that, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a pre-reading variation command (pre-reading variation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 is converted so as to be convenient for processing by the effect control device 300. First, the process of setting the look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of held numbers of the symbols of the latest hold information (step C313) is performed, and the information of the special figure type of the start memory corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation system command received this time and the corresponding A MODE conversion table for converting MODE is set according to the current number of reservations of the special figure type.

Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE corresponding to the look-ahead variation command MODE is acquired (step C314). Further, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the sub-internal look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACT is acquired (step C316).

The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the content and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE change depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of pre-judgment and the special figure fluctuation display game start. The judgment result may differ depending on the judgment of the time. Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the look-ahead notice effect without being affected by the number of holds at the time of judgment, the MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of judgment. It is possible to handle in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, non-reach out-of-reach fluctuations that may have a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding situation, and non-reach out-of-reach fluctuations that have a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding situation. It is converted into a MODE classified by the matters to be considered in the setting of the look-ahead notice effect so that the process of the look-ahead notice effect can be easily and surely performed.

In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, even in normal reach, for example, there are various modes even in the same type of reach, as the final stop symbol is set to stop one frame before the reach symbol, to stop one frame ahead, and to hit. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. Therefore, by converting the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system to the same ACT, the number is reduced, and the processing load such as the check in the processing of the look-ahead notice effect is reduced.

Next, it is determined whether the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C317). If both MODE and ACT after conversion are not other than 0 (step C317; N), the command value is abnormal, so the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the read-ahead variable command area corresponding to the latest hold information and the number of holds.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a limit flag set in the limit period that limits the execution of the look-ahead effect (step C319), and if there is a limit flag (step C319; Y), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. .. In this case, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but the look-ahead information is in a saved state. If there is no restriction flag (step C319; N), a look-ahead command consistency check process (step C320) for determining whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal is performed.

If the command combination is not normal as a result of the look-ahead command consistency check process (step C320) (step C321; N), the look-ahead variable command process is terminated. On the other hand, when the command combination is normal (step C321; Y), the look-ahead lottery process (step C322) for drawing the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the look-ahead notice effect is generated (step C323).

Then, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is not generated (step C323; N), the pre-reading variable command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the look-ahead notice effect is generated (step C323; Y), is the generated look-ahead notice effect (that is, the look-ahead notice effect selected in the look-ahead lottery process (step C322)) immediately started? Is determined (step C324). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, the effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading advance notice effect performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and is an effect or variation that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variation display games. There are effects such as giving a notice by the character appearing during the display, and a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display at a timing later than the present time. As for the timing to start the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game ends and the execution of the next special figure variation display game starts. The timing of the game is applicable.

If the effect is not to start immediately (step C324; N), the look-ahead variable command process ends. In this case, the notice is set at the start of the special figure variation display game for executing the look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, in the case of the effect to be started immediately (step C324; Y), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading advance notice effect is set (step C325), and the pre-reading variable command processing is ended.

[Limited period management process]
FIG. 48 shows the time limit management process performed in the variable command process (see FIG. 35). In this limit period management process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a limit flag (step C431), and if there is no limit flag (step C431; N), the limit period management process ends. In this case, the time limit is not set. If there is a limit flag (step C431; Y), the limit number is updated by -1 (step C432), and it is determined whether the limit number has become 0 (step C433).

If the limit number of times is not 0 (step C433; N), the limit period management process ends. In this case, the restriction period continues. When the limit number of times becomes 0 (step C433; Y), the limit flag is cleared (step C434), and it is determined whether or not there is a start memory generated in the limit period (step C435). In this case, the restriction period ends.

If there is no start memory generated in the time limit period (step C435; N), the time limit period management process ends. If there is a start memory generated in the limited period (step C435; Y), the read-ahead information of the earliest start memory among the start memories generated in the limited period is prepared (step C436), and steps C437 to C442 are performed. Perform processing. This process is the same as the process of steps C320 to C325 in the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command process, and thereby sets the look-ahead effect for the start memory generated in the limited period.

After that, it is determined whether all the start memories generated in the limited period have been processed (step C443), and if all have been processed (step C443; Y), the limited period management process ends. If not all have been processed (step C443; N), look-ahead information for the next start memory of the start memory for which processing has been completed among the start memories generated in the limited period is prepared (step C444), and in step C437. go back. As a result, the look-ahead effect is set for each of the start memories generated in the limited period.

In the above-mentioned limited period, the effect control device 300 does not perform the process of selecting the pre-reading effect so that the pre-reading effect is not executed, and when the limited period ends, the pre-reading effect of the start memory generated in the limited period is selected. However, any kind may be used as long as the look-ahead effect is restricted during the limited period. For example, with respect to the start memory generated in the limited period, the look-ahead effect may not be performed even after the limited period ends.

Further, it may be displayed in the special figure start memory display or other areas that the execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted. In this case, the pre-reading effect may not be executed even if the limited period ends, and the pre-reading effect may be executed when the limited period ends.
In the example shown in FIG. 44, since the look-ahead effect may be executed for the start memories d and e when the limited period ends, even if the start memories a, b, and c are displayed separately. good. As a distinction between such displays, for example, "x" is displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display of the start memory a, b, and c to indicate that the look-ahead effect is not executed even if the restriction period ends, and the start is started. The decorative special figure start memory display of the memories d and e may display "preparing" to indicate that the look-ahead effect may be executed when the time limit period ends. In addition to the "preparing" display, for example, the remaining time until the end of the time limit may be displayed on the timer display. However, since the exact time until the end of the time limit is unknown until the start of game c, the timer display should be updated to the exact time until the end of the time limit after the start of game c. ..

In addition, during the limited period, we did not change the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display, but for one or both of the start memory that existed before the power failure and the start memory that occurred during the limited period. During the limited period, the effect that is not based on the look-ahead information may be executed. As the effect that is not based on the look-ahead information, the effect may be different from the look-ahead effect, or may be the same effect as the look-ahead effect. When the same effect as the look-ahead effect is used, a specific effect whose suggested expectation is equal to or less than a certain value is performed. For example, it is possible to execute only the look-ahead effect that has the lowest expected degree of suggestion, or the look-ahead effect that can be selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern or result of the special figure variation display game, and the actual special figure variation display game. It is preferable that there is no contradiction with the content.

Further, in the case where the look-ahead effect is started with a change effect such as the character working on the decorative special figure start memory display, the change effect can be executed during the limited period, but the look-ahead effect is not started. You may do so. For example, the character works on the decorative special figure start memory display, but the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is not changed.
Examples of such a change effect include a blinking display of the decorative special figure start memory display and a change in the shape of the decorative special figure start memory display, and such a change effect is performed even during the limited period. Make it feasible. For example, in the case of a display in which the decorative special figure start memory display imitates an egg, an effect of cracking the egg is performed as a change effect, and a look-ahead effect is executed when the egg is broken, the egg is cracked. It is possible to execute until the stage of the production to enter even during the limited period.
In addition, when the start-up memory is sequentially digested, the decoration special figure start-up memory display moves to a predetermined position, so that the display mode such as shape and color changes, so that the change effect on the digestion of the start-up memory is performed. If so, such a change effect can be executed even during the limited period.
Further, as will be described later, as a result of the change effect, the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display may not be changed as a result of the change effect.

Further, for the start memory generated in the limited period, the effect control device 300 does not perform the process of selecting the look-ahead effect in the limited period, but the effect control device 300 pre-reads the start memory generated in the limited period even in the limited period. The process of selecting the effect may be performed. In this case, the selected look-ahead effect may not be performed during the limited period but may be started after the limited period ends. Further, if the selected look-ahead effect is a specific effect, it may be started even during the limited period, and if it is not a specific effect, it may be started after the end of the limited period. The specific effect is an effect in which the suggested expectation is below a certain value. For example, a look-ahead effect with the lowest suggested expectation may be used, or a look-ahead effect other than the look-ahead effect with the highest suggested expectation may be used. good. Further, when it is possible to select an effect having an expectation degree of a certain value or less as a specific effect, the selection probability of the selectable effect may be the same as the selection probability when it is not a limited period, or the limited period. There may be less or more selection probabilities than if not.

Further, when selecting the look-ahead effect during the limited period for the start memory generated in the limited period, a selection table different from the case of selecting the look-ahead effect outside the limited period may be used. For example, a specific table, which is a selection table when selecting a look-ahead effect during a limited period, is one of the look-ahead effects that can be selected in a normal table, which is a selection table when selecting a look-ahead effect outside the time limit. Only the part can be selected. Some of the effects include, for example, an effect whose expected degree of suggestion is below a certain value, a look-ahead effect that can be selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern or result of the special figure variation display game, and the expected degree of suggestion. Is a production other than the pre-reading production with the highest value.

Further, the end of the limited period may be set as the start of the special figure variation display game that is digested last among the start memories that existed before the occurrence of the power failure. The limited period is limited because the effect control device 300 cannot grasp the variation mode and result of the special figure variation display game based on these start memories because the look-ahead information of the start memory that existed before the occurrence of the power failure is lost. It was set to prevent inconsistencies and inconsistencies with the look-ahead effect of the started memory that occurred, but the special figure fluctuation display game that was last digested among the start memories that existed before the power failure started. Since all the variation modes and results of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory that existed before the occurrence of the power failure are known at that time, there is no problem even if the restriction period ends at this point.

Further, even if the start memory is generated in the limited period, the game control device 100 makes a preliminary determination, but the start memory generated in the limited period is stored in the game control device 100 until the limited period ends. It is also possible not to make a preliminary judgment of. That is, the game control device 100 may limit the look-ahead effect. In this case, the pre-judgment may be performed after the end of the limited period and the look-ahead information may be transmitted to the effect control device 300, or the start memory generated in the limited period may be pre-determined even after the limited period ends. You may not have it.

Further, with the recovery of the power failure, the start memory that existed before the power failure may be determined again in advance, and the look-ahead information may be transmitted to the effect control device 300. In this way, there is no contradiction in the look-ahead effect even if a limited period is not set.

Further, although the look-ahead effect is restricted during the limited period, it is also possible to limit the effect other than the look-ahead effect such as a part of the effect of the special figure variation display game being executed. For example, the effect display on the running storage display unit 84 may be restricted. On the contrary, even if the period is limited, the effect of explaining the game may not be restricted, and the frequency may be higher than that when the period is not limited.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a variable display game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a favorable state for the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a start winning opening Random information is extracted based on the winning of the game ball to (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97), and the execution right of the variable display game is determined as the starting memory together with the random number information. A start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to the upper limit of the number of, and a pre-determination means that can determine random information before the variable display game corresponding to the start memory stored in the start storage means is executed. (Game control device 100) is provided, and when a power failure occurs and is restored, the period from the restoration of the power failure to the establishment of a predetermined condition is set as a limited period, and the identification is a new start memory generated in the limited period. Regarding the start memory, it is possible to limit a part or all of the advance notice effect, which is a advance notice effect using the determination result of the advance determination means for the specific start memory, until the restriction period ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contradictory advance notice effect from being executed due to the loss of the advance determination result due to the power failure, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Further, the limited period is a period until all the variable display games based on the start memory that existed at the time of the power failure are completed. Therefore, the period can be easily understood by the player.

Further, the advance determination means determines the specific start memory even during the limited period, and the control means does not perform a part or all of the advance notice effect for the specific start memory until the limited period ends. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from being executed during the limited period. In addition, the preliminary determination result for the specific start memory generated during the limited period can be acquired, and the advance notice effect can be executed at a later opportunity.

In addition, there are a plurality of types of advance notice effects having different reliability, which is a high possibility of producing a special result, and the control means selects a plurality of types of advance notice effects according to the determination result by the advance determination means. It is configured to select the advance notice effect using a selection table with a fixed probability, and the selection table includes a specific table used during the limited period and a normal table used outside the limited period. The advance notice effect that can be selected by is a part of the advance notice effects that can be selected by the normal table and whose reliability is lower than a predetermined value. Therefore, although the advance notice effect can be executed even during the limited period, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect having contradictory contents from being executed, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

In addition, the pre-determination means will not make a determination about the specific start memory until the restriction period ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from being executed during the limited period.

Next, as a game effect, a standby notification that can suggest that the expectation level, which is a high possibility of a special result, can be suggested and that the player is waiting for the execution of a predetermined effect will be described. To do. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to notify that the player is waiting for the execution of the button effect for operating the effect button 25 as a predetermined effect by the standby notification display 631 which is one of the standby notifications.

FIG. 49 shows an example of a notification effect in which the standby notification display is displayed.
When a predetermined notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the special figure variation display game, a notification display 630 indicating that the execution of the button effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 25 is awaited is made as shown in FIG. 49 (a). The predetermined notification condition can be arbitrarily set, for example, when a predetermined timing is reached in a special figure variation display game in which a button effect is performed, or when a predetermined lottery for determining the presence or absence of notification is won. is there.

After the notification display 630 is performed, the standby notification display 631 indicating that the button effect is scheduled to be performed is displayed as shown in FIG. 49 (b). Here, on the standby notification display 631, the display of "x2" indicating that the button effect is scheduled to be performed twice is attached, and the number of operation rights is also indicated. The number of times the button effect is performed is selected from one or a plurality of times, and the scheduled number of button effects indicated by the standby notification display 631 is various with respect to one notification display 630.

The standby notification display 631 is a display that imitates the effect button 25, making it easy to visually understand that the effect of operating the effect button 25 is waiting. Further, in the standby notification display 631, an additional display of "stock" is made so that it can be easily distinguished from the promotion image 632 that prompts the operation of the effect button 25. Of course, the display mode of the standby notification display 631 is not limited to this.

The higher the number of times the button effect is executed, the higher the expectation that a special result is likely to occur. Therefore, the larger the number of scheduled button effects indicated by the standby notification display 631, the higher the expectation. ing. Further, even when the standby notification display 631 for notifying the same scheduled number of times is displayed, it is divided into the case where all notifications are made by the display of one notification display 630 and the case where the display is divided into a plurality of notification displays 630. Even when the standby notification display 631 for finally notifying the same scheduled number of times is displayed, the degree of expectation suggested may differ depending on the number of times of notification display 630.

After that, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the standby notification display 631. This change effect may not be executed. The change effect here is a button effect separate from the button effect announced on the standby notification display 631. In this change effect, a promotion image 632 that prompts the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49 (c), and when the effect button 25 is operated according to the promotion image 632, as shown in FIG. 49 (d). Correspondence display 633 is made according to the operation. Then, the corresponding display 633 acts on the standby notification display 631 to change the display mode of the standby notification display 631 as shown in FIG. 49 (e). The display mode of the standby notification display 631 suggests the degree of expectation, and here, it indicates that the display mode of FIG. 49 (e) has a higher degree of expectation than the display mode of FIG. 49 (b). It has become.

In addition to the case where the display mode is changed to the display mode shown in FIG. 49 (e) through the change effect as described above, the display mode shown in FIG. 49 (e) is directly after the notification display 630 of FIG. 49 (a) without undergoing the change effect. It may change to. Even in the case where the display mode is finally shown in FIG. 49 (e), the degree of expectation suggested differs depending on whether or not the change effect is used. That is, not only the display mode itself but also the process of change contributes to the suggestion of the degree of expectation.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is better to directly change to the display mode shown in FIG. 49 (e) without going through the change effect than to obtain the display mode shown in FIG. 49 (e) via the change effect. , The expectation to suggest is high. The change effect can be executed a plurality of times, and even when the display mode is finally determined, the expected degree of suggestion may decrease each time the change effect is executed.

In addition, there are more cases where the display mode shown in FIG. 49 (e) is obtained via the change effect than when the display mode is directly changed to the display mode shown in FIG. 49 (e) without going through the change effect. That is, it is designed that the frequency of occurrence is higher but the degree of expectation is low when the effect is changed, and the frequency of occurrence is lower but the degree of expectation is higher when the effect is not changed.

Although the change effect is a button effect, it may be an effect other than the button effect. Further, the standby notification display 631 may be changed without undergoing a special effect such as a change effect. Further, the change in the display mode is not limited to the change in color shown in FIG. 49, and may be any change such as a change in size or shape or a change in display position. Further, when a plurality of effect buttons 25 and an operation unit (lever, etc.) other than the effect button 25 are provided, it is possible to notify the type of the operation unit to be operated by the standby notification display 631. The operation unit to be operated may be changed.

FIG. 50 shows an example of the button effect foretold by the standby notification display 631.
First, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the standby notification display 631 moves to the center of the display area, and becomes a promotion image 632 that prompts the operation of the effect button 25 as shown in FIG. 50 (b). Further, the number of button effects indicated by the standby notification display 631 is subtracted by 1 with the start of the button effect, but the number of button effects indicated by the standby notification display 631 remains once, so the display of the standby notification display 631 is maintained. Will be done.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 25, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the corresponding display 633 that suggests or notifies the variation mode and the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed.
Subsequently, the standby notification display 631 moves to the center of the display area as shown in FIG. 50 (d), and becomes a promotion image 632 that prompts the operation of the effect button 25 as shown in FIG. 50 (e). Further, with the start of the button effect, the number of button effects indicated by the standby notification display 631 is subtracted by 1 to become 0, so that the standby notification display 631 is deleted.
When the player operates the effect button 25, as shown in FIG. 50 (f), the corresponding display 633 that suggests or notifies the variation mode and the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed.

In addition, although the case where the button effect foretelled by the standby notification display 631 is executed in one special figure variation display game is executed here, the button effect is executed a plurality of times over a plurality of special figure variation display games. It may be done.
Further, after executing a part of the button effect announced on the standby notification display 631, the notification effect may be performed to increase the number of button effects announced on the standby notification display 631.

Further, the button effect as shown in FIGS. 50 (b) and 50 (c) may be executed without the standby notification display 631. In this case, the degree of expectation suggested may be different depending on whether the standby notification display 631 is accompanied or not.
Further, when the button effect is executed, the ratio of the case where the standby notification display 631 is performed and the case where the standby notification display 631 is not performed can be arbitrarily set. For example, the ratio of the case where the standby notification display 631 is performed and the case where the standby notification display 631 is not performed may be the same.
Further, in a state where the execution of the button effect is announced on the standby notification display 631, it may be possible to execute a button effect different from the button effect announced on the standby notification display 631. In this case, the execution of the button effect does not reduce the number of executions announced on the standby notification display 631.

Further, the standby notification display 631 may be for notifying the execution other than the button effect, and may be any one for notifying the execution of some effect. For example, the execution of the look-ahead effect may be announced, and in this case, the number of start memories to be the target of the look-ahead effect may be announced, or the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display may be used as the look-ahead effect. It may foretell the number of times it may change.

Further, although the standby notification display 631 capable of notifying that the predetermined effect is waiting to be executed has been described, if the standby notification display 631 is not notified that the predetermined effect is waiting to be executed, it is assumed that the standby notification display 631 is not notified. It can be used as a suggestion display that can suggest the degree of expectation, which is likely to result in a special result.
That is, it is a display that suggests the degree of expectation depending on the display mode, and even if the same display mode is used, the display that suggests the degree of expectation differs depending on the process up to the display mode.
Even if it has a function of suggesting only the degree of expectation, it becomes a novel suggestion display that suggests different degrees of expectation even if the display mode is the same, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (g), in addition to the promotion image 632, a time value display 651 indicating a time value in which the effect button 25 can be operated may be performed. In the time value display shown here, the length of the bar-shaped display shown by shading becomes shorter as the time value at which the effect button 25 can be operated decreases. Further, the display mode (shape, color, etc.) of the time value display 651 may be different depending on the presence / absence of the waiting button effect and the number of times of the standby button effect.
Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (g), the time value display 651 of the waiting button effect may be performed for the button effect waiting on the standby notification display 631. In this case, the time value display 651 may be performed for all the waiting button effects, or the time value display 651 may be displayed for some button effects such as the button effect to be executed next and the button effect with high expectation. You may do it. Further, a temporary time value display 651 that has nothing to do with the actual time value may be displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the time during which the effect button 25 can be operated in the button effect is set regardless of the presence / absence of the standby button effect and the number of standby button effects. The time during which the effect button 25 can be operated in the button effect may be different depending on the presence or absence of the waiting button effect and the number of times of the standby button effect. For example, when there is a waiting button effect, the time during which the effect button 25 can be operated in the button effect may be shorter or longer than when there is no waiting button effect. Further, as the number of standby button effects increases, the time during which the effect buttons 25 can be operated in the button effects may be shortened or lengthened. When performing the time value display 651 in which the length of the bar-shaped display becomes shorter as the time value at which the effect button 25 can be operated decreases, the shorter the time during which the effect button 25 can be operated in the button effect, the rod-shaped display. The display of is shortened and the speed is increased.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the corresponding display 633 is executed when the effect button 25 is operated in the button effect, regardless of the presence or absence of the standby button effect and the number of standby button effects. Although the execution time is set, the execution time of the corresponding display 633 may be different depending on the presence or absence of the waiting button effect and the number of times of the waiting button effect. For example, when there is a waiting button effect, the execution time of the corresponding display 633 may be shorter than when there is no waiting button effect. Further, the execution time of the corresponding display 633 may be shortened as the number of standby button effects increases.

Further, the execution time may be different depending on the display content of the corresponding display 633. For example, the corresponding display 633 with a high expectation may have a longer execution time than the corresponding display 633 with a low expectation.
Further, the time during which the effect button 25 can be operated and the execution time of the corresponding display 633 may be different depending on the execution time of the button effect. For example, the time during which the effect button 25 can be operated and the execution time of the corresponding display 633 are longer in the button effect executed in the latter half of the special figure variation display game than in the button effect executed in the first half of the special figure variation display game. May be longer. The first half and the second half of the special figure fluctuation display game may be separated by the first half and the second half of the fluctuation time, the first half may be before the reach state occurs, and the second half may be after the reach state occurs. In addition to this, the execution time may be different depending on the presence / absence of the waiting button effect and the number of standby button effects.

Further, the display mode (shape, color, etc.) of the standby notification display 631 is not a single display mode, but may have a plurality of display modes. Furthermore, it may be possible to change the display mode. Further, depending on the display mode of the standby notification display 631, a suggestion or notification about the standby effect may be given. For example, the display mode of the standby notification display 631 may suggest the degree of expectation indicated by the corresponding display 633.
Further, the display mode of the standby notification display 631 may be changed according to the change of the display contents around the standby notification display 631. Further, the standby notification display 631 may be a transparent display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the continuously displayed standby notification display 631 from deteriorating the visibility and decorativeness of the effect being executed.

51 and 52 show another example of the standby notification display.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the display imitating the effect button 25 is covered with a plurality of panels 635, and if all the panels 635 are removed, the foretold button effect is executed. Is. The panel 635 can be erased by the player operating the effect button 25, and the operation right for erasing the panel 635 is given a predetermined number of times. Here, four operation rights are given, and the number of panels 635 is the same as the number of operation rights. That is, the display on the panel 635 makes a standby notification display indicating that the button effect for operating the effect button 25 is waiting for execution and the number of operation rights.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), at the first operation timing, the promotion image 632 prompting the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed, and the remaining number of operations that can be performed is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 25, the effect display 636 is displayed on the panel 635 to be erased as shown in FIG. 51 (c), and the panel 635 is erased as shown in FIG. 51 (d).

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (e), at the second operation timing, the promotion image 632 that prompts the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed, and the remaining number of operations that can be performed is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 25, the effect display 636 is displayed on the panel 635 to be erased as shown in FIG. 51 (f), and the panel 635 is erased as shown in FIG. 51 (g). Here, the two panels 635 are erased at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (h), at the third operation timing, the promotion image 632 that prompts the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed, and the remaining number of operations that can be performed is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 25, the effect display 636 is displayed on the panel 635 to be erased as shown in FIG. 51 (i), and the panel 635 is erased as shown in FIG. 51 (j). This erases all panels 635, indicating that the given mission was successful. In addition, it is shown that the button effect accompanying the success of the mission is waiting.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52A, when the fourth operation timing is reached, the promotion image 632 prompting the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed, and the remaining number of operations that can be performed is displayed. As mentioned above, the mission has already been successful, but the production will continue for the number of operations that was originally planned. When the player operates the effect button 25, the effect display 636 is displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (b), and the button effect accompanying the success of the mission continues to be on standby as shown in FIG. 52 (c). Is shown.
If the mission has already succeeded but the number of operations that can be performed remains, the effect different from the mission may be performed by operating the effect button 25 with the remaining number of operations that can be performed.
When all the operation rights notified on the standby notification display 631 are exhausted, the button effect accompanying the success of the mission is started as shown in FIG. 52 (d).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 (e) and 52 (f), the standby notification display 631 has a plurality of display modes, and the degree of expectation suggested differs depending on the display mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (g), the number of operation rights may differ, and the number of panels 635 forming the standby notification display 631 is also set according to the number of operation rights.

FIG. 53 also shows another example of the standby notification display.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 53A, a reel display 637 imitating a reel on which a plurality of symbols are displayed is made, and the player operates the effect button 25 to stop the reel display 637 that displays a variable display. If the symbol imitating the effect button 25 is stopped, the acquisition effect that gives the operation right in the later effect is executed, and the number of operation rights acquired in this acquisition effect is displayed on the standby notification display 631. There is.

As shown in FIG. 53 (b), the variation display of the reel display 637 is started, and when the player operates the effect button 25, the variation display is stopped as shown in FIG. 53 (c). Here, the display of "x" is stopped, indicating that the operation right could not be acquired.
Next, the variable display of the reel display 637 is started as shown in FIG. 53 (d), and when the player operates the effect button 25, the variable display is stopped as shown in FIG. 53 (e). Here, the display imitating the effect button 25 is stopped and displayed, indicating that the operation right has been acquired. Along with the acquisition of this operation right, the standby notification display 631 is displayed.

After that, the acquisition effect progresses as described above, and as shown in FIG. 53 (f), the operation right is acquired five times. The display mode of the standby notification display 631 changes depending on the number of acquired operation rights, and is set to be different for each of 1 to 4 times, 5 to 9 times, 10 times or more. ..

When the acquisition effect is completed, the notification effect using the acquired operation right is started. When the notification effect is started, the standby notification display 631 moves above the display area and is arranged in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 53 (g). Then, the standby notification display 631 at the left end moves to the center of the display area and changes to a promotion image 632 that prompts the operation of the effect button 25, and when the player operates the effect button 25, as shown in FIG. 53 (h). Correspondence display 633 corresponding to the operation is performed. After that, the same effect is repeated until all the operation rights indicated by the standby notification display 631 are exhausted.

The content of the standby notification display may be other than those described above. For example, in the above example, it is notified that the button effect that involves the player's operation is waiting to be executed, but the effect that does not involve the player's operation is also notified that the player is waiting. You may. As shown in FIG. 54A, the type of character appearing in the subsequent development, the content of the effect to be executed, and the like may be notified. In this case, the display may be performed according to the executed time series, or may be displayed regardless of the time series.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), it may be shown that the addition of the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the time saving state or the high probability state is waiting. In this example, the time saving state is set, and it is shown that the remaining number of times display unit 641 indicating the number of times the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is executed will end when the special figure variation display game is executed six more times. ing.
On the standby notification display 631, it is displayed that 10 times of addition, 20 times of addition and 5 times of addition are waiting as the addition value of the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state. , These will be sequentially added to the remaining number display unit 641. The standby notification display 631 does not have to clearly notify the number of times, and may display the fact that addition is performed or the possibility that addition is performed.
Further, the same standby notification display 631 can suggest addition to the number of executable games such as the AT state, the RT state, or the ART state in the slot machine.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), when executing the look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display, the character acting on the decorative special figure start memory display is displayed as the standby notification display 631. Is also good.
Make sure that the high possibility that the look-ahead effect is executed and the high degree of expectation shown in the look-ahead effect differ depending on the type of character that works on the start memory display, and the character is kept on standby on the standby notification display 631. Therefore, it is possible to suggest what kind of content the pre-reading effect is waiting for.

Further, the standby notification is not limited to the one displayed on the display device 41, and may be indicated by the light emission of an LED separate from the display device 41, the position and movement of an operable accessory, the light emission mode, and the like. good. That is, the notification means capable of executing the predetermined standby notification including the standby notification display 631 may include not only the display device 41 but also a light emitting means composed of LEDs and the like, an operable accessory and the like.

From the above, it is possible to execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a predetermined notification can be executed in a game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player. The notification means (display device 41) and the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game are provided, and the effect control means is specific when a specific effect is scheduled to be executed. It is possible to execute a standby notification (standby notification display 631) that can notify that the production is waiting to be executed by the notification means, and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that will be a special result depending on the display mode of the standby notification. It means that the degree of expectation suggested by the case where the notification mode is changed from the start of the notification of the above and the case where the notification mode is changed after the start of the notification of the standby notification is different. Therefore, even if the notification mode is the same, the degree of expectation to be suggested will be different, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means can execute a specific effect a plurality of times, and can suggest the number of times the specific effect is executed depending on the display mode of the standby notification. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of times a specific effect is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means changes the number of executions of the specific effect suggested from the start of the standby notification notification to a predetermined number of times and the number of executions of the specific effect suggested after the start of the standby notification notification to the predetermined number of times. This means that the degree of expectation suggested in is different from that in the case of. Therefore, even if the number of executions is the same, the degree of expectation to be suggested will be different, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, it is provided with an operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player, and the effect control means can execute a change effect that is an effect that can change the notification mode of the standby notification based on the operation of the operation means. Become. Therefore, since the standby notification can be changed according to the operation of the player, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control means has different expectations depending on whether or not the change effect has been performed. Therefore, even if the notification mode is the same, the degree of expectation to be suggested will be different, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, a notification means (notifying means) capable of executing a predetermined notification in a game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. A display device 41) and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game are provided, and the effect control means executes the specific effect when the execution of the specific effect is scheduled. It is possible to execute a standby notification (standby notification display 631) that can notify that the person is waiting, and it is possible to suggest a degree of expectation that will be a special result depending on the notification mode of the standby notification, and execute a specific effect. In this case, the probability of executing the standby notification and the probability of not executing the standby notification are the same, and the degree of expectation suggested differs depending on whether or not the standby notification is executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to the standby notification, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when a game is executed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result, a production control means for controlling the production of the game in a game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player ( The effect control device 300) is provided, and the effect control means can execute a suggestion effect (standby notification display 631) capable of suggesting an expectation degree as a special result, and in a predetermined effect mode from the start of the suggestion effect. It means that the degree of expectation suggested is different between the case where there is a suggestion effect and the case where the predetermined effect mode is changed after the start of the suggestion effect. Therefore, even if the production mode is the same, the degree of expectation to be suggested will be different, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, it is provided with an operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player, and the effect control means can execute a change effect that is an effect that can change the effect mode of the suggestion effect based on the operation of the operation means. Become. Therefore, since the suggestion effect can be changed according to the operation of the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect control means has different expectations depending on whether or not the change effect has been performed. Therefore, even if the production mode is the same, the degree of expectation to be suggested will be different, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, a display device 41 capable of displaying information on a game on a game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. The effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game and the operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player are provided, and the effect control means is a specific one that involves the operation of the operation means. When the execution of the effect is scheduled, the display device 41 can display the standby notification display 631 capable of notifying that the specific effect is waiting to be executed. In the specific effect, the operation means can be displayed. It is configured to display the promotion image 632 that prompts the operation, and the standby notification display 631 is a display that imitates the operation means and is provided with an additional display indicating that it is different from the promotion image 632. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the promotion image 632 and the standby notification display 631.

Next, the display mode of the identification information of the decorative special figure variation display game when the specific effect is executed as the effect of the special figure variation display game will be described. The specific effect is an effect performed in a state in which the display mode of the identification information is different from that in the case where the specific effect is not the case, and the effect display using each of the identification information is performed. The specific effect is different from the display mode in which the variable display of the identification information is displayed in a variable manner by moving from top to bottom in a state where it is difficult to see at high speed, which is a normal display mode. It can be said to be a production. In the present embodiment, as the specific effect, it is possible to execute the first specific effect and the second specific effect in which the display mode of the identification information is different from that in the case where the specific effect is not the specific effect.

55 and 56 show an example of the first specific effect. As shown in FIG. 55A, each of the identification information of the present embodiment includes a character portion 87a, a character portion 87b, and a decorative portion 87c attached to the character portion 87b. In this embodiment, numbers are used as characters, and the character portion 87b can be said to be a number portion. In the variable display when the specific effect is not being executed, the identification information in which the character unit 87a, the character unit 87b, and the decorative unit 87c are integrally displayed is displayed in a variable manner. That is, when the specific effect is not being executed, the display mode includes at least the character portion 87b and the decoration portion 87c, and here, the display mode further includes the character portion 87a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55B, when the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached. In the temporarily stopped state, the character part 87a, the character part 87b, and the decorative part 87c of the identification information are displayed so as to sway, indicating that the identification information is not completely stopped.

As shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the effect progresses and the specific effect is started after the reach state is reached, the character portion 87a is deleted from the identification information, and the character portion 87b is easily recognized. .. In the first specific effect, the decorative portion 87c is also displayed in addition to the character portion 87b. In this effect, first, the identification information of the left variation display area and the right variation display area is displayed by the character unit 87b and the decoration unit 87c by erasing the character unit 87a, and is reduced and displayed above the display area. At this time, the character portion 87b and the decorative portion 87c are displayed so as to sway, indicating that they are not completely stopped.
Further, in the medium variation display area, the identification information displayed by the character portion 87b and the decorative portion 87c is rotated in the vertical direction located at the center of the character portion 87b in the horizontal direction as shown by a dotted line in the figure. It is displayed so that it changes while rotating around the axis.

The decorative portion 87c is arranged at a position which is the lower right front when viewed from the front side of the character portion 87b facing the front and is not on the extension line of the rotation axis.
As a result, when the character portion 87b faces to the right as shown in FIG. 55 (d), the decorative portion 87c is located on the right side of the character portion 87b, and the character portion 87b is rearward as shown in FIG. 55 (e). The decorative portion 87c is located to the left rear of the character portion 87b in the facing state, and the decorative portion 87c is located to the left of the character portion 87b when the character portion 87b is facing to the left as shown in FIG. 55 (f). become.
In particular, when a Chinese numeral is used as the character portion 87b as in the present embodiment, it may be difficult to tell whether the character portion 87b is facing the front or the rear, but the decoration portion 87c By providing the above, it becomes possible to easily determine in which direction the rotating character portion 87b is facing.

As shown in FIG. 55 (g), before and after the state in which the character portion 87b faces the front, the rotation speed decreases, and an effect of whether or not the fluctuation display is stopped is performed. At this time as well, the decorative portion 87c is displayed so as to sway, indicating that it is not completely stopped. If the rotation is completed in the state of FIG. 55 (g), the result of the deviation is obtained and the special figure variation display game ends. In this example, the rotation does not end, and as shown in FIG. 55 (h), the rotation changes to the next identification information "three" and the rotation continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (i), the character portion 87b is in a state of facing backward, and as shown in FIG. 55 (j), the character portion 87b is in a state of facing left, and then shown in FIG. 56 (a). As described above, the rotation speed decreases with the character portion 87b facing the front. Even here, the rotation does not end, and as shown in FIG. 56B, the rotation changes to the next identification information "4" and the rotation continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the character portion 87b is in a state of facing backward, and as shown in FIG. 56 (d), the character portion 87b is in a state of facing left, and then shown in FIG. 56 (e). As described above, the rotation speed decreases with the character portion 87b facing the front. If the rotation is not completed here, the information changes to "5", which is the next identification information, and then stops, resulting in an disconnection result.

In this example, the rotation is completed here, and all the identification information is temporarily stopped in the state shown in FIG. 56 (e). At this time, the character portion 87b and the decorative portion 87c are displayed so as to sway, indicating that they are not completely stopped.
Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (f), the identification information of the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area returns to the original position, and the display of the character unit 87a is resumed as shown in FIG. 56 (g). Also at this time, the character portion 87a, the character portion 87b, and the decoration portion 87c are displayed so as to sway, indicating that they are not completely stopped.
After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (h), the variation display is stopped and the stop time for displaying the result is reached, and after the stop time elapses, the fanfare effect in the special gaming state is started as shown in FIG. 56 (i).

As described above, in the first specific effect, there is no period during which the identification information becomes invisible, and the identification information is always in a visible state.
In such an effect, by displaying the decorative part 87c, it is possible to make it easy to understand the state of the character part 87b and whether or not it is a temporary stop, and it becomes easier to understand the effect and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.
Further, among the identification information, the character portion 87a includes the most complicated drawing contents, and by not displaying the character portion 87a, in the effect of performing the display that operates three-dimensionally as described above. It is possible to reduce the amount of data required for expressing three-dimensional movements and reduce the burden of control processing.

FIG. 57 shows another example of the first specific effect. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area to reach a reach state, and as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the first specific effect is started and the identification information is identified. The character portion 87a is erased from. At this time, the character portion 87b and the decorative portion 87c are displayed so as to sway, indicating that they are not completely stopped.

The identification information of the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area is reduced and displayed above the display area. Further, the identification information of the medium fluctuation display area changes after a state in which the continuous identification information before and after is displayed in multiples. First, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the identification of "two" is performed. The information is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 57 (c), the identification information of "two" and the identification information of "three", which is the next identification information, are displayed in a plurality of manners, as shown in FIG. 57 (d). The identification information of "2" is deleted and only the identification information of "3" is displayed. Even in this process, the character portion 87b and the decorative portion 87c are displayed so as to sway, indicating that they are not completely stopped.

Further, in a state where the identification information is displayed in a plurality of manners, the decoration portion 87c is attached to each identification information.
As a result, the decorative portion 87c is also displayed in multiples, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the identification information is displayed in multiples.
In particular, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), even in a state where one identification information "three" and the other identification information "two" almost overlap, the identification information is multiplexed due to the displacement of the position of the decorative portion 87c. It is possible to make it easier to recognize that it is displayed.

If the change is completed in the state of FIG. 57 (d), the result of the deviation is obtained and the special figure variation display game ends. In this example, the change is not completed, and the identification information of the next identification information "4" is displayed in multiples as shown in FIG. 57 (e), and "3" is displayed as shown in FIG. 57 (f). The identification information of "" is deleted and only the identification information of "4" is displayed. If the change is not completed here, the information is changed to the next identification information "five" and then stopped, resulting in an disconnection result.

In this example, the change is completed here, and all the identification information is temporarily stopped in the state shown in FIG. 57 (f). At this time, the character portion 87b and the decorative portion 87c are displayed so as to sway, indicating that they are not completely stopped.
Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (g), the identification information of the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area returns to the original position, and the display of the character unit 87a is restarted as shown in FIG. 57 (h). Also at this time, the character portion 87a, the character portion 87b, and the decoration portion 87c are displayed so as to sway, indicating that they are not completely stopped.
After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (i), the variation display is stopped and the stop time for displaying the result is reached, and after the stop time elapses, the fanfare effect in the special gaming state is started as shown in FIG. 57 (j).

In addition, in order to make it easy to recognize that the identification information is displayed multiple times, the position of the decorative portion 87c is made different in each identification information so that the deviation of the position of the decorative portion 87c can be easily recognized. Is also good. In particular, it is preferable that the positions of the decorative portions 87c of the identification information that may be displayed multiple times are different.

FIG. 58 also shows another example of the first specific effect. As shown in FIG. 58A, after the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area to reach the reach state, the first specific effect is started. In this first specific effect, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the display area is divided into four, and a decorative special figure variation display game based on identification information including the character portion 87b and the decorative portion 87c is displayed in each area. If the result is a big hit, one of them will be a special result, and if the result is a miss, all will be a miss result.
In addition, although the images in each area are independently displayed in the background, the images in each area use the same series of images, and the images in each area are displayed out of alignment by different playback timings. I am trying to do it.

As shown in FIG. 58 (c), the upper left region is first closed up and the variable display is stopped. Here, the result of the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, at this time, in the image in the lower right region, the timing is set so that the image of the tiger forming the specific image 99 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), the upper right area is closed up and the variable display is stopped. Here, too, the result of the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, at this time, in the image in the lower left region, the timing is set so that the image of the tiger forming the specific image 99 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), the lower left region is closed up and the variation display is stopped. Here, too, the result of the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, at this time, the image of the tiger forming the specific image 99 is displayed at the timing of the image in the upper right area.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (f), the lower right region is closed up and the variation display is stopped. Here, the special result is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, at this time, in the image in the upper left region, the timing is set so that the image of the tiger forming the specific image 99 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (g), the identification information of the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area returns to the original position and the fluctuation display is stopped, and as shown in FIG. 58 (h) after the stop time elapses. The fanfare production in the special game state is started.
In this example, the special figure variation display game is ended without restarting the display of the character unit 87a when the special result is temporarily stopped. However, as shown in FIGS. 57 (h) and 57 (i), the character unit The display of 87a may be restarted. Of course, in the example of FIGS. 55 to 57, the special figure variation display game may be ended without restarting the display of the character unit 87a when the result is temporarily stopped as in this example.

As described above, in this effect, the image of the tiger forming the specific image 99 is in the lower right, corresponding to the close-up order of each area being performed in the order of the upper left area, the upper right area, the lower left area, and the lower right area. The timing for playing back the image is set so that the area, the lower left area, the upper right area, and the upper left area are displayed in this order.
The series of images displayed in the background are images of the sun peeking through clouds, images of thunder, images of clouds on the moon, images of the moon and stars, images of tigers forming specific image 99, images of shooting stars, and images of rain. , The images of the sun are displayed in this order. Then, the reproduction start position in FIG. 4B is set so that the timing is delayed in the order of the upper left region, the upper right region, the lower left region, and the lower right region.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), at the timing of starting the reproduction of the video, the lower right region, which is the fourth close-up, is closed in the upper left region than the timing when the specific image 99 is displayed. Playback starts from the point in front of you for the time required to start the up.
Further, in the upper right region, reproduction is started from a point before the timing required for the start of the close-up in the lower left region, which is the third close-up, than the timing when the specific image 99 is displayed.
Further, in the lower left region, playback is started from a point before the timing when the specific image 99 is displayed by the time required until the start of the close-up in the upper right region, which is the second close-up.
Further, in the lower right region, reproduction is started from a point before the timing when the specific image 99 is displayed by the time required until the start of the close-up in the upper left region, which is the first close-up.

By doing so, the close-up timing and the display timing of the specific image 99 match, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
In addition, since the images in each area are different images, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed independently in each area.

The close-up order and the display order of the specific image 99 can be arbitrarily set, and the specific image 99 may be displayed in the close-up area.
Further, although the specific image 99 is a part of a series of images, an image independent of the series of images such as a cut-in image may be displayed. In this case, the background image may be an arbitrary image, and only the display timing of the cut-in image may be controlled.

FIG. 59 shows an example of the second specific effect of the specific effect. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), when the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area to reach the reach state and the specific effect is started, the left fluctuation is left as shown in FIG. 59 (b). The identification information of the display area and the right-handed variable display area is reduced and displayed above the display area.
As for the identification information of the left variation display area and the right variation display area, the character portion 87a is erased and the character portion 87b and the decoration portion 87c are displayed. At this time, the character portion 87b and the decorative portion 87c are displayed so as to sway, indicating that they are not completely stopped.

The identification information of the medium fluctuation display area is completely erased and invisible as shown in FIG. 59 (b), and gradually partially displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (c). As shown in (d), the whole is displayed and becomes visible. In this second specific effect, only the character portion 87b is displayed and the decorative portion 87c is not displayed. In addition, the character portion 87b is displayed so as to sway, indicating that it has not stopped completely. If you stop in this state, the result will be off and the special figure fluctuation display game will end.

In this example, the fluctuation does not end, the effect display 89a is performed so as to sandwich the medium fluctuation display area as shown in FIG. 59 (e), and the identification information of the medium fluctuation display area is performed as shown in FIG. 59 (f). The effect display 89b is performed so that the identification information becomes invisible.
The effect display 89a shown in FIG. 59 (e) indicates a range in which the next effect display 89b shown in FIG. 59 (f) is displayed. That is, it is shown that the next effect display 89b is displayed between the two effect displays 89a in FIG. 59 (e).
By performing the effect display 89a as shown in FIG. 59 (e), it is possible to show the player which position the line of sight should be directed to in the next development, and the effect of the production can be enhanced, which is a hobby of the game. Can be improved.
Further, by performing the effect display 89a as shown in FIG. 59 (e), it becomes possible to suggest that the identification information sandwiched between the effect display 89a becomes invisible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (g), the next identification information “4” is gradually partially displayed, and as shown in FIG. 59 (h), the whole becomes visible.
If the fluctuation does not end here, it will stop after changing to the next identification information "five", resulting in a loss result.
In this example, the fluctuation ends here, and as shown in FIG. 59 (i), the identification information of the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area returns to the original position, the fluctuation display stops, and the stop time elapses. Later, as shown in FIG. 59 (j), the fanfare production in the special gaming state is started.

In addition, in FIGS. 59 (e) and 59 (f), when the identification information becomes invisible, the effect display 89a and 89b are performed, but the effects are shown in FIGS. 59 (c) and 59 (d). The character portion 87b may be gradually partially invisible by performing the opposite effect.
Further, in FIGS. 59 (c) and 59 (d), when the identification information changes from the invisible state to the visible state, the display gradually becomes partially visible. The effect opposite to that shown in FIGS. 59 (e) and 59 (f) may be performed so that the character portion 87b becomes visible together with the effect displays 89a and 89b.

Further, the next effect display 89b is displayed within the range indicated by the effect display 89a shown in FIG. 59 (e), but the next effect display 89b is displayed within the range indicated by the effect display 89a shown in FIG. 59 (e). The next effect display 89b may extend outside the range shown by the effect display 89a shown in FIG. 59 (e).
Further, the identification information of the left variation display area and the right variation display area may be limited to the character portion 87b without displaying the decoration portion 87c.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60A, the effect display 89a displayed so as to sandwich the medium fluctuation display area is provided on the board decoration device 46 provided above the display device 41 and below the display device 41. It is displayed so as to connect the board effect device 44.
Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (b) from the state of FIG. 60 (a), the identification information rises as the board effect device 44 rises, and the effect display 89a retracts, and from the state of FIG. 60 (b). As shown in FIG. 60A, the identification information may be lowered and the effect display 89a may be extended as the board effect device 44 is lowered.
By doing so, the operation of the board effect device 44 can be linked with the identification information and the effect display 89a, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the effect display 89a is performed so as to sandwich the identification information of the left fluctuation display area, and as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the next effect is displayed in the area sandwiched between the effect display 89a. 89b may be displayed so that the identification information becomes invisible.
Of course, it is also possible to display the effect display 89a so as to sandwich the identification information of the right fluctuation display area and display the next effect display 89b in the right fluctuation display area.
Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (e), the effect display 89a is displayed so as to sandwich a plurality of identification information, and as shown in FIG. 60 (f), the next effect display 89b is displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. It is also possible to do.

Further, even if the effect display 89a as shown in FIG. 60A or the like is displayed, the next effect display 89b may not be displayed and the identification information may not be invisible.
Further, the possibility that the next effect display may be displayed may differ depending on the color and shape of the effect display 89a as shown in FIG. 60A and the like.
Further, the effect display 89a is not limited to the second specific effect, and any effect may be used as long as the effect display 89b is displayed at a predetermined position.

In the second specific effect shown above, the process of forming the identification information such as the process of changing the identification information from the invisible state to the visible state, and the process of changing the identification information from the visible state to the invisible state. It includes a process that destroys identification information such as a process. In the example of FIG. 59, both processes are included, but only one of the processes may be included.
In this way, when the identification information includes a process of making the identification information invisible, the character portion 87b is recognized by eliminating the extra decoration by displaying only the character portion 87b without displaying the decoration portion 87c. We are trying to improve the fun of the game by making it easier to understand the content of the production.

From the above, a display means for displaying a game on a game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. A (display device) 41 and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the display of the display means are provided, and the effect control means displays a decorative game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information corresponding to the game. When it is configured to be displayed on the means and the specific effect is not being executed, each of the identification information is decorated by a display mode including a number part (character part 87b) and a decoration part 87c attached to the number part. When the game is displayed and the specific effect is being executed, the effect display is performed using each of the identification information, and when the first specific effect of the specific effect is being executed, the effect display is displayed. The identification information is displayed by the number unit and the decoration unit 87c, and the identification information in the effect display is displayed by the number unit during the execution of the second specific effect of the specific effect.
Therefore, the display mode of the identification information can be changed according to the type of the effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, an appropriate display mode of the identification information can be selected according to the type of effect, and the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

Further, when the specific effect is not being executed, the display mode is such that the character unit 87a is included in the identification information.
Therefore, the decorativeness of the identification information can be improved.

Further, in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, a display device 41 that displays a game is displayed. An effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the display of the device 41 is provided, and the effect control means displays a decorative game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information in accordance with the game on the display device 41. When the specific effect is not being executed, the decorative game is displayed in a display mode including the character unit 87a, the character unit 87b, and the decorative unit 87c attached to the character unit 87b. When the specific effect is being executed, the decorative game is displayed in a display mode in which each of the identification information does not include the character unit 87a, and the effect display using the identification information is performed. During the execution of the first specific effect, the identification information in the effect display is displayed by the character unit 87b and the decoration unit 87c, and during the execution of the second specific effect of the specific effect, the identification information in the effect display is displayed. It is displayed only by the character part 87b.
Therefore, the display mode of the identification information can be changed according to the type of the effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, an appropriate display mode of the identification information can be selected according to the type of effect, and the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

Further, the first specific effect is an effect in which the identification information in the effect display is rotated, and the decorative portion 87c is arranged at a position other than on the extension line of the rotation axis when the identification information is rotated.
Therefore, the rotation state of the identification information can be grasped from the position of the decorative portion 87c, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the first specific effect is an effect of displaying one or a plurality of identification information multiple times in the effect display.
Therefore, the presence of the decorative portion 87c makes it easier to understand that the identification information is displayed in a plurality of manners, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the second specific effect is an effect of changing the identification information from an invisible state to a visible state in the effect display, or an effect of changing the identification information from a visible state to an invisible state in the effect display. It becomes.
Therefore, by displaying only the character portion 87b, extra decoration is eliminated to enhance the recognition of the character portion 87b, making it easier to understand the content of the production and improving the interest of the game.

Next, the setting of the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 and the execution memory display displayed on the execution memory display unit 84 will be described.
By changing the display mode, the decorative special figure start memory display can suggest or notify the result obtained by the preliminary determination and the information of the fluctuation pattern.
In addition, the running memory display can suggest or notify the result and the information of the fluctuation pattern obtained by the preliminary judgment and the judgment at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game by changing the display mode. ..

As shown in FIG. 61A, six display modes 1 to 6 are provided in the display modes of the decorative special figure start memory display and the execution memory display. These are designed to have different expectations for the suggested jackpots. The display mode 2 is a blinking display mode.
Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), five of A to E are provided for the change effect which is the effect at the timing when the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display and the execution memory display can be changed.
The change effect A does not perform the effect, and can be executed both when the memory display is changed and when it is not changed.
The change effect B is an effect in which the character acts on the memory display to change the memory display, and the change effect C is an effect in which the character acts on the memory display as in the change effect B, but the memory display does not change.
The change effect D is an effect that can be executed only by the execution memory display, and is an effect in which the execution memory display is changed with a dedicated effect. Further, the change effect E is also an effect that can be executed only by the execution memory display, and is an effect that performs the same effect as the change effect D but does not change the execution memory display.

FIG. 62 shows an example of a change effect. 62 (a) and 62 (b) show an example in which the change effect A without the effect is executed as the change effect.
First, as shown in FIG. 62A, there are two start memories at the end of the special figure variation display game, and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is digested first is set as the display mode 1. The decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory to be digested second is set as the display mode 3.

When a new special figure variation display game is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is digested first is displayed on the running memory display unit 84. It is migrated and displayed as a running memory display. At this time, the change effect A without the effect is executed to change from the display mode 1 to the display mode 3.
Further, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second digested start memory shifts to the left in the standby memory display unit 83. At this time, the change effect A without the effect is executed to change from the display mode 3 to the display mode 5.

FIGS. 62 (c) and 62 (d) show a case where the change effect B in which the character acts on the memory display to change the memory display is executed as the change effect.
When a new special figure variation display game is started from the state shown in FIG. 62 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is digested first inherits the display mode 1 and is a running memory display. Therefore, it is assumed that the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second digested start memory is shifted to the left by taking over the display mode 3 in the standby memory display unit 83.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the change effect B in which the character acts on the running memory display is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the display mode of the running memory display changes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), a change effect B in which the character acts on the decorative special figure start memory display is performed, and then the display mode changes as shown in FIG. 62 (d).
In the case of the change effect C, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the character acts on the memory display, but the display mode does not change.

Note that FIG. 62 (b) shows an example in which the change effect A is executed for both the running memory display and the decorative special figure start memory display, and FIG. 62 (c) shows the running memory display and the decorative special figure start memory display. Although the example in which the change effect B is executed is shown for both of the above, it is not always necessary to perform the same change effect for both the running memory display and the decorative special figure start memory display, and the change effect can be arbitrarily selected for each. is there.

In FIGS. 62 (e) to 62 (h), as a change effect, an effect dedicated to the running memory display is performed to change the display mode. The change effect D and the character act on the memory display to change the running memory display. The case where B is executed is shown.
When a new special figure variation display game is started from the state shown in FIG. 62 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is digested first takes over the display mode 1 and is being executed. And, as shown in FIG. 62 (e), it is in the reach state.

Along with this, as a change effect D as shown in FIG. 62 (e), an effect display which is an effect dedicated to the execution memory display is performed with respect to the execution memory display, and a display mode is performed as shown in FIG. Changes.
In the case of the change effect E, the effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (e), but the display mode of the memory display during execution does not change.
Further, when it is time to develop the reach effect after that, an effect in which the character acts on the memory display as the change effect B is performed as shown in FIG. 62 (g), and as shown in FIG. 62 (h). The display mode of the running memory display changes.

The change timing of the memory display during execution depends on the effect content of the special figure variation display game being executed, and the timing may differ depending on the effect to be executed.
Although FIGS. 62 (e) to 62 (h) show an example of the case where the SP reach effect is performed, the change timing may be different from the change timing shown here depending on the content of the effect of the special figure variation display game.
By making the change timing dependent on the effect being executed in this way, the change in the memory display during execution and the progress of the effect are linked, and the game is compared to the one that changes at a uniform timing. Can improve the interest of.

Next, the setting of the effect as described above will be described.
The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display and the setting of the change effect are performed when the start memory is generated.
The items to be set are the initial display mode, which is the display mode when the display of the decorative special figure start memory display is started, and the display when the corresponding decorative special figure start memory display is deleted as the start memory is digested. It is a type of change effect that executes the final display mode, the process of change from the initial display mode to the final display mode, the display start of the decorative special figure start memory display, and the display mode at each changeable timing.

FIG. 63 shows an example of a selection table for setting the display mode and the change effect of the decorative special figure start memory display. This selection table is a selection table used when the start memory to be digested third occurs, and is a normal game state that is not a time saving state or a high probability state, and the result is a special figure variation display game. Is a selection table for start-up memory in which SP reach is executed.
The selection of this table is the result or variation pattern of the special figure variation display game obtained from the contents of the look-ahead stop symbol command and the look-ahead variation pattern command transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the special figure hold information determination process shown in FIG. It is done based on the information of. In addition, game status information and pending number information are also used.

The start memory is the timing when the start memory is generated, the prize is won, the start memory is the timing when one is exhausted, the hold 2 shift, and the start memory is the timing when the display of the start memory display can be changed. There are three timings at the time of one hold shift, which is the timing of two digestions.
Since the prize is started without any change effect at the time of winning, only the display mode is defined, and this display mode is the initial display mode. Further, at the time of the hold 2 shift and the hold 1 shift, the display mode after the lapse of the timing and the type of change effect at the timing are defined. The display mode shown in the column at the time of hold 1 shift is the final display mode.

In this selection table, patterns 1 to 80 are prepared as selectable patterns, and one pattern is selected from among them in one lottery.
For example, when the pattern 1 is selected, it is displayed in the display mode 1 at the time of winning, the change effect A is performed at the hold 2 shift to maintain the display mode 1, and the change effect A is performed at the hold 1 shift to display the display mode 1. The change that is maintained is set.
When the pattern 59 is selected, it is displayed in the display mode 2 at the time of winning, the change effect B is performed at the hold 2 shift to change to the display mode 3, and the change effect A is performed at the hold 1 shift to display the display mode 4. The change to be changed to is set.

In addition, the display mode of the running memory display and the setting of the change effect are performed when a new special figure change display game is started.
Since the change timing of the running memory display depends on the effect content of the special figure variation display game being executed, the running memory display is displayed after the fluctuation pattern is determined with the start of the special figure variation display game. It is necessary to set the display mode and change effect.

The items to be set are the initial display mode, which is the display mode when the display of the running memory display is started, and the final display mode, which is the display mode when the running memory display is deleted with the end of the special figure variation display game. , The process of change from the initial display mode to the final display mode, the type of change effect that is executed at the start of display of the memory display during execution or at each timing at which the display mode can be changed.
In the case of the memory display during execution, the initial display mode, the final display mode, and the process of change are performed in one lottery, and the type of change effect is performed in another lottery.

FIG. 64 shows an example of a selection table for setting the display mode of the running memory display and the change effect. This selection table is a normal game state that is not a time saving state or a high probability state, executes a special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order, and selects a variation pattern in which SP reach as shown in FIG. 62 is executed. It is a selection table used when it is done.
The selection of this table includes a decorative special figure command transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the stop symbol setting process of FIGS. 20 and 21, and a variation command transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the variation start information setting process of FIG. 22. It is performed based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game and the information of the fluctuation pattern obtained from the contents of. In addition, game status information and pending number information are also used.

The timing at which the running memory display can be changed includes the timing at which the decorative special figure start memory display shifts to the running memory display at the time of shift, and the timing at this fluctuation pattern at the timing at which the reach state occurs. When a certain reach occurs, the timing at the time of SP development, which is the timing at which the SP reach state is developed, is provided.
In this case, the display mode at the time of shift is the initial display mode, and the display mode at the time of SP development is the final display mode.

In the case of the memory display during execution, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), a first selection table for selecting a display mode at each timing and FIGS. 64 (b) to (d) and (e) to (g). ), And a second selection table for selecting the change effect at each timing, and a lottery is performed in two stages.
For example, when patterns 1, 11, 17 or 20 are selected in the first selection table shown in FIG. 64 (a), then the second selection table shown in FIGS. 64 (b) to (d) is used. The change effect at each timing is selected.
Further, when the pattern 6 or 15 is selected in the first selection table shown in FIG. 64 (a), the second selection table shown in FIGS. 64 (e) to 64 (g) is used thereafter at each timing. Change production is selected.
In this second selection table, items are set with the distribution value set to 0 even for the change effect that is not selected. By doing so, the data structures of the plurality of second selection tables become the same structure, and the processing becomes easy.

Since this is a selection table when SP reach is executed as shown in FIG. 62, the timing of change is set to shift time, reach occurrence time, and SP development time. The timing and number of these changes differ depending on the content of the production performed in.
By making the running memory display change in conjunction with the production of the special figure variation display game in this way, the change in the running memory display and the progress of the production are linked, and at a uniform timing. It is possible to improve the interest of the game compared to the one that makes a change.

As described above, when selecting the display mode of the memory display and the change effect, in the case of the decorative special figure start memory display, since there are not so many patterns that can be selected, it is possible to perform by a one-step lottery. This makes it possible to simplify the process.
On the other hand, in the case of the memory display during execution, since there are many types of change effects and the timing of change varies depending on the change pattern, the number of patterns that can be selected becomes enormous when all combinations are combined. For this reason, the two-stage lottery is used to prevent the selection table from becoming bloated and reduce the processing load. Of course, a multi-stage lottery with more than two stages may be used.

As described above, the lottery of the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is the look-ahead stop symbol command and the look-ahead variation pattern command transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the special figure hold information determination process shown in FIG. The lottery of the display mode of the running memory display is performed based on the information, and the decorative special figure command transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the stop symbol setting process of FIGS. 20 and 21 and the fluctuation start information setting of FIG. 22 are performed. This is performed based on the information of the variable command transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the process. That is, the lottery is performed based on the latest information recognized by the effect control device 300 (information on the last received command among the related commands).
However, in the lottery of the display mode of the running memory display, the lottery continues to use the information of the look-ahead stop symbol command and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command, which are the information when the start memory occurs, instead of the decorative special figure command and the change command. You may.
Further, in the pattern selection according to FIGS. 63 and 64 (a), the selection probabilities of the respective patterns may be the same, or the selection probabilities may be biased so that a specific pattern is likely to appear.

From the above, when the game is executed based on the winning in the starting area and the result of the game becomes a special result, the information on the game is provided in the game machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player. A displayable display means (display device 41), an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the display on the display means, and a start area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning). A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit of start memories, which is the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball to the device 37), is provided, and the effect control means is being executed. Information on the start memory corresponding to the game can be displayed by the display mode of the start memory display corresponding to the start memory, and the information on the start memory corresponding to the running game can be displayed on the running memory display corresponding to the start memory. The display mode of the start memory display, which can be displayed according to the display mode of the above, is selected by using one selection table, and the display mode of the running memory display is selected by the first selection table. The selection using the first selection table and the selection using the second selection table selected based on the selection result using the first selection table are performed.
Therefore, the burden of control can be reduced.

Further, in the effect control means, as the display mode of the running memory display, the initial display mode at the start of the display, the final display mode at the end of the display, and the process of changing from the initial display mode to the final display mode are changed. It is configured to select a change effect to be executed at a possible timing, and the initial display mode, the final display mode, and the process of change are selected from the first selection table, and are selected according to the selection result. The change effect is selected by the second selection table.
Therefore, the burden of control can be reduced.

In addition, when the game is executed based on the winning in the starting area and the result of the game becomes a special result, the information on the game can be displayed on the game machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player. Display means (display device 41), effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling display on the display means, and start area (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 97, ordinary variable winning device 37). A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories, which is the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball, is provided, and the effect control means corresponds to the running game. The information of the starting memory to be used can be displayed by the display mode of the running storage display corresponding to the starting memory, and the selection of the display mode of the running storage display is the selection using the first selection table and the first selection. The selection is performed by the selection using the second selection table selected by the selection result using the table.
Therefore, the burden of control can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 64, when the display mode and the change effect of the storage display are selected by the plurality of selection tables, the items to be selected in each selection table can be arbitrarily set.
For example, the initial display mode and the final display mode may be determined by the first selection table, and then the process of change and the type of change effect may be determined by the second selection table.
By first determining the initial display mode and the final display mode, the patterns that can be selected next can be narrowed down, and the processing can be performed efficiently.

Further, regarding the decorative special figure start memory display, the type of display mode that can be selected as the initial display mode may be different depending on the start memory existing at the time of winning.
For example, when a prize is won in a state where the starting memory number is 0, the display mode 2 may not be selected as the initial display mode.
The display mode 2 is a blinking display mode, but when the number of start memories is 0, the decorative special figure start memory display is displayed only for a very short period of time, and the blinking may not be recognized. The display mode of is selected.

Further, when a prize is won in a state where the starting memory number is 0, the selection probability of the display mode 3 may be the highest as the initial display mode.
When the number of start memory is 0, the prize is displayed only for a very short period of time in the decorative special figure start memory display, and there is no opportunity to change the display mode in the decorative special figure start memory display. Only change. Therefore, in the case of the display mode 1 having the lowest expectation, the expectation of changing to the display mode having the highest expectation is low. Further, in the case of a display mode having a high degree of expectation such as display mode 5, a change to a display mode having a high degree of expectation cannot be expected so much, so that the expectation for the change is low when there are few opportunities for change. Will end up.
For this reason, when the display modes are divided into three groups in descending order of expectation, the selection probability of the display mode 3 belonging to the medium group is set to be the highest. The selection probability may be the second highest for the display mode 4.

In addition, for the decorative special figure start memory display, the display mode and change effect are selected at the time of winning, and for the running memory display, the display mode and change effect are selected at the start of the special figure change display game. The display mode and the change effect may be selected at a timing other than this.
For example, with respect to the decorative special figure start memory display, the display mode and the change effect may be selected at each of the change timings such as when the start memory is generated and when the start memory is shifted due to digestion.
Further, regarding the execution memory display, the display mode and the change effect may be selected at each of the change timings such as shift time, reach occurrence time, and SP development time.
Further, regarding the execution memory display, the display mode and the change effect may be selected when the corresponding start memory is generated. In particular, when the details of the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are found by prior determination when the start memory is generated, the change timing according to the content of the effect is also known, so that the selection becomes easy.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and the effect and the like shown in the above-described embodiment can be similarly executed. Hereinafter, parts having the same configuration will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described. The game machine of this modified example differs in the configuration of the game board and the transition of the game state.

FIG. 65 shows a front view of the game board 30 in this modified example.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 491 is provided along the guide rail 31 and forms a guide path 490 for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44, which is a movable effect device for producing a game including a special figure variation display game by using a movable effect member 44a that operates. In the initial state, the board effect device 44 is in a position retracted from the display area of the display device 41, and can operate from this position toward the center of the display device.

Further, in the lower left of the center case 40, a sub that displays the fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variation display game separately from the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the start memory number. An information display device 90 is provided.

The sub-information display device 90 is a first light emitting unit composed of a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game. A second sub composed of a sub-game display unit 91 and a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit that displays a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. It includes a game display unit 92. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game by the two light emitting units, and the second special figure variation display game are executed by the two light emitting units. A second sub-display unit 94 indicating the number of second start-up memories, which is the right to play, is provided.

In the first sub-game display unit 91 and the second sub-game display unit 92, the light emitting unit turns off, blinks, and lights a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the variation display and a display indicating the result. Can be displayed by. In addition, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 turn off the two light emitting units, respectively, for the number of the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) and the second start memory (special figure 2 hold). It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

By providing the sub-information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the display area of the display device 41 is not occupied by displaying the fourth symbol on the display device 41, and the display area is effectively utilized. be able to. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operating range of the board effect device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operating the board effect device 44. ..

Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the right side of the center case 40. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 69).
Further, below and on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate 34 (a normal figure start gate, a normal figure start area, an inflow area) that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. .. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 69).

Below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and directly below the normal drawing start gate 34, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a start condition of the first special figure variation display game is given. ) Is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 69). Since the start winning opening 36 is provided directly below the normal figure start gate 34, the first start memory can be generated immediately after the normal figure start memory is generated.

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40, a pair of movable members 37b and 37b that can be opened in an inverted "C" shape at the upper part and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in are provided, and a second start prize is won inside. An ordinary variable winning device (Public train) 37 having a mouth (starting winning area) is arranged. The pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37 always keep a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) at intervals of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since a game nail is provided above the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in the predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation prize is opened by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 69) as a driving device to open in an inverted "C" shape. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 69). It should be noted that the game ball can be won even in the closed state, and the game ball may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

At the lower right of the center case 40, a first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. There is. The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c in which the upper end side rotates in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be opened, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the big winning opening is changed from the closed state (the closed state which is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (the state which is advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by an upper large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 69) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state or During the small hit game state, the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). It is designed to do. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), an upper large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 69) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. There is.

Below the start winning opening 36, a second special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. There is. The second special variable winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and is the result of a special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the big winning opening is changed from the closed state (the closed state which is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (the state which is advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 39c driven by a lower large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 69) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state or During the small hit game state, the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). It is designed to do. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a lower large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 69) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. There is. Further, below the second special variable winning device 39, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

FIG. 66 shows the flow path of the game ball in the first special variable winning device 38. Inside the first special variable winning device 38 (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a is provided as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first special variable winning device 38. ing. All the game balls that have entered the first special variable winning device 38 are detected through the upper large winning opening switch 38a and flow into the upper flow path 38j.

The upper flow path 38j is provided with a specific area 38h through which the game ball can flow, and is operated by a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 69) so as to change the inflow probability of the game ball into the specific area 38h. A lever member 38i is provided. The lever member 38i is a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction and projects forward to cover the specific area 38h as shown in FIG. 66. Therefore, it can be converted into an open state in which the game ball can flow into the specific area 38h.

A specific area switch 38d capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area 38h, and the game ball that has flowed into the specific area 38h flows into the lower flow path 38k after being detected by the specific area switch 38d. A special gaming state is generated based on the detection of the gaming ball by the specific area switch 38d during the small hit gaming state.

Further, a passage port switch 38g capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side to the left of the specific area 38h in the upper flow path 38j, and the game ball that has not flowed into the specific area 38h is a passage port. After being detected by the switch 38g, it flows into the lower flow path 38k. The lower flow path 38k is adapted so that the flow path through which the game ball passing through the specific region 38h flows down and the flow path through which the game ball passing through the passage port switch 38g flows down are merged on the downstream side. A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided at the downstream end of the lower flow path 38k, and all the game balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k are detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e. After that, it flows into the discharge flow path for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine.

In the first special variable winning device 38 configured in this way, the number of game balls detected by the upper prize opening switch 38a matches the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the passing port switch 38g. As a result, it can be confirmed that all the game balls that have flowed into the upper flow path 38j have been discharged. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the passage port switch 38g matches the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, all the game balls that have flowed into the lower flow path 38k are discharged. You can confirm that it was done. Further, when the number of inflowing game balls detected by the upper prize opening switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e match, the game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 It can be confirmed that all have been discharged.

In the game machine 10 of the present modification, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed), aiming to win a prize in the normal drawing start gate 34, the start winning opening 36, and the second special variable winning device 39. By launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the player can win a prize in the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39. It is possible to aim at.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displaying various information is provided.

FIG. 67A shows the specifications of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The jackpot probability is 1/300 for both the 1st special figure variation display game and the 2nd special figure variation display game. In addition, the small hit occurs only in the second special figure variation display game, and is 298/300. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not won in duplicate.
That is, the probability of the first special result (big hit) is the same value in both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game and is always a constant value. , The probability of losing, the probability of a big hit, and the probability of a second special result (small hit) increase in that order. In the special figure 2 variable display game, the off-limits result may not be derived.

The big hit is a special result (first special result) with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and the first as a special electric accessory. 2 It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the special variable winning device 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example.

The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning. From the above, the special result includes the first special result (big hit) capable of generating the first special gaming state (special gaming state) and the gaming value that can be given to the player more than the first special gaming state. A second special result (small hit) capable of generating a low second special gaming state (small hit gaming state) is included.

There are two types of jackpots, with 10R electric support and without 10R electric support. With 10R electric support, the number of rounds is 10 and either the condition of playing the special figure 1 variable display game 10 times or the special figure 2 variable display game once after the end of the special game state is satisfied. It is a big hit that will be in the state of general electric support. No 10R electric support is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal electric support state is not reached after the end of the special game state. The distribution probability of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is the same in all of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the V prize that is a prize in the specific area 38h, but they are different. You may. In addition, the probability that the normal map fluctuation display game will be a hit is 1/251 in the low probability state (not in the normal power support state), and 250 / in the high probability state (normal power support state). It is 251. It should be noted that the probability of the normal map may be set to 0/251 in the state where the normal power is not supported.

The Fuden support is intended to improve the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. In the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the present embodiment, the hit probability of the normal map is higher than that without the normal power support, and the fluctuation time of the normal map is shortened. By lengthening the opening time, the opening time per unit time of the normally variable winning device 37 is improved to facilitate winning. Of course, other methods may be used to improve the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time to facilitate winning.

Further, the upper limit of the number of start memories is four first start memories, which is the start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game, and one second start memory, which is the start memory of the special figure 2 variable display game. It has become.
In addition, the second start memory is digested in preference to the first start memory.
The upper limit value can be arbitrarily set, and the upper limit number that can store the second start memory may be smaller than the upper limit number that can store the first start memory.

FIGS. 67 (b) and 67 (c) show the opening modes of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39.
When the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the case of a small hit, is the opening mode of opening A shown in FIG. 67 (b). In this opening A, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the small hit (t31), and the first special variable winning device 38 is temporarily closed when the opening time of 100 ms elapses (t32). After that, when the closing time of 2000 ms elapses, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t33), and either the openable time of 1600 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins. When the condition of is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t36).

Further, in the opening A, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on with the opening start of the first special variable winning device 38, and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member 38i covers the specific area 38h and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member 38i retracts from the specific area 38h and the game ball cannot flow. Is ready to flow in. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f continues to be in the ON state even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and is in the OFF state 100 ms before the end of the remaining ball processing time (t34). Then, 100 ms after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t35). That is, almost all the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 flow into the specific region 38h.

When the game ball flows into the specific area 38h, the special game state is set when the remaining ball processing time ends (t35). The jackpot type selected in this case is a 10R jackpot, but since the opening of the first special variable winning device 38 at the opening A is the first round, the opening of the second special variable winning device 39 is the ninth round. .. The opening of the second special variable winning device 39 is performed at the opening B. On the other hand, when the game ball does not flow into the specific area 38h, the game shifts to the normal game state after the remaining ball processing time ends.

In this way, in the opening A in the case of a small hit, by first opening for a short time (t31 to t32), the player can be made aware of the special variable winning device released by the operation, and the first special It is possible to make the player aware that the variable winning device 38 should be aimed at. Further, by temporarily closing the state after the first opening, it is possible to provide a grace period for the player to make a right-handed hit after recognizing that the player should aim at the first special variable winning device 38.

That is, if the first special variable winning device 38 is only opened for a certain period of time from the start of the small hit, the openable time may be consumed before recognizing that the first special variable winning device 38 should be aimed. There is. However, it is possible for the player to aim for a prize by first opening the short opening and then opening the second time after the grace period has elapsed.

A game nail (not shown) is arranged on the game board 30 so as to guide the game ball to the first special variable winning device 38, and if the player is hitting right, the first special variable winning device 38 will almost certainly be reached. The game balls are designed to win a prize, and almost all the inflowing game balls flow into the specific area 38h. That is, when the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, the game ball almost certainly flows into the specific area 38h and a special game state is generated. It can be said that when the game ball wins the first special variable winning device 38, the probability of flowing into the specific area 38h is higher than the probability of not flowing into the specific area 38h.

Further, when the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, the opening mode of the opening B shown in FIG. 67 (c) is adopted. In this opening B, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened (t11) with the start of the round, and either the openable time of 25,000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are won. When the condition of is satisfied, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the interval time is started (t12), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t13). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

FIG. 68 shows the transition of the gaming state in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST1, a special gaming state ST2, a specific gaming state ST3, and a small hit gaming state ST4. In each game state, the presence / absence of the normal electric support controlled by the game control device 100, the effect mode for determining the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300, and the launch direction of the game ball are determined. In the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, it is possible to aim for a prize in the starting winning opening 36 by hitting the left side, and mainly aiming for a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37 by hitting the right side. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will.

The normal game state ST1 is a state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 without a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is set to the normal mode when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and is set to the second chance mode when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. In addition, the launch direction is left-handed, and the game is played aiming at the starting winning opening 36. When the jackpot, which is the first special result, is derived in this normal game state ST1, the state shifts to the special game state ST2. Further, when the small hit, which is the second special result, is derived in the normal game state ST1, the state shifts to the small hit game state ST4.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the normal game state ST1, it is mainly due to the second start memory that existed when shifting from the specific game state ST3. When the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, most of the results are missed, but when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, most of them are big hits or small hits, and the special gaming state ST2 occurs with a high probability. Therefore, the effect mode is different from the case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed.

The special game state ST2 is a state in which there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a special game mode. In this special game state ST2, since the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, it is instructed to aim at winning the second special variable winning device 39 by right-handed, but even if left-handed, the second special variable winning device 39 is instructed. It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 39.

When the special game state ST2 is reached based on the jackpot without electric support (here, there is no 10R electric support), the normal game state ST1 is entered when the special game state ends. When the special game state ST2 is reached based on the jackpot with electric support (here, there is 10R electric support), the game shifts to the specific game state ST3 when the special game state ends.

The specific gaming state ST3 is a state in which it is possible or easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 because there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. Compared with the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the normal map variation display game is shortened, but the execution time of the special figure variation display game is not shortened. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a specific game mode. The firing direction is right-handed, and the game is usually aimed at the variable winning device 37.

The average value of the execution time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the specific game state ST3 is longer than the average value of the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal game state ST1. Special Figure 2 Most of the variable display games are big hits or small hits, and the special game state ST2 occurs, but if the interval at which the special game state ST2 occurs is too close, a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short time and the gambling is high. It will be too much. Therefore, the period of staying in the specific gaming state ST3 is lengthened to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the time required to generate the second start memory is secured so that the next special game state ST2 is surely generated.
The average value of the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game may be the same as the average value of the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal game state ST1, or the average value of the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal game state ST1. It may be longer than the average value of execution time.

When the jackpot, which is the first special result, is derived in this specific game state ST3 and the special figure variation display game ends, the game shifts to the special game state ST2. Further, when the small hit, which is the second special result, is derived in the specific game state ST3 and the special figure variation display game ends, the game shifts to the small hit game state ST4. Further, if the end condition of the electric support is satisfied without deriving the special result in the specific game state ST3, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1. The end condition of the electric support is that either the special figure 1 variable display game is played 10 times or the special figure 2 variable display game is played once.

The small hit game state ST4 is a state in which there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit mode. In this small hit game state ST4, since the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, it is instructed to aim at winning the first special variable winning device 38 by hitting right.

If there is a prize (V prize) in the specific area 38h in the small hit game state ST4, the process shifts to the special game state ST2 with the end of the small hit game state ST4. If there is no prize (V prize) in the specific area 38h in the small hit game state ST4, the mode shifts to the normal game state ST1 with the end of the small hit game state ST4.
As described above, if the player hits the right side, it will almost certainly flow into the specific area 38h.

FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
Basically, it is the same as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, but the proximity I / F 121a and 121b have a specific area switch 38d provided in a specific area in the first special variable winning device 38 and a first special variable winning device 38. The discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the game ball discharged from the device 38 and the passage port switch 38g for detecting the game ball staying above the specific area in the first special variable winning device 38 are connected.

Further, the second output port has an upper large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, a lower large winning opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variable winning device 39, and a normal variable winning device 37 for opening. The operation data of the electric solenoid 37c and the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38 is output.
Further, the first driver (drive circuit) 138a includes an upper prize-winning solenoid 38b, a lower prize-winning solenoid 39b, a normal variable winning device 37, and a normal electric solenoid 37c, which is output from the second output port 134. The solenoid drive signal is generated and output by receiving the operation data signal of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member in the variable winning device 38.

[Special game processing]
Further, instead of the special figure game process (see FIG. 11) described above, the special figure game process shown in FIG. 70 is performed. In this special figure game process, a specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the detection of a game ball in the specific area 38h is performed (step A31).

Further, as the processing related to the small hit, the processing of steps S32 to S35 is performed. In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit medium processing. The small hit fanfare middle process (step A32) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A33) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. ..

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end processing The small hit remaining ball processing (step A34) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A35) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.
In addition, a lever solenoid control process (step A36) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
FIG. 71 shows a specific area switch monitoring process (step A31) in the above-mentioned special figure game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit is in progress (step A41). Here, the small hit during the small hit is a period during which the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If this small hit is not in progress (step A41; N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. That is, the specific area switch 38d is effective only during the period during which the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. Further, when the small hit is in progress (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is in operation (step A42).

When the condition device is operating (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the condition device is not in operation (step A42; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the specific area switch (step A43). Then, when there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. When there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), the specific area passage flag is set (step A44), and the specific area switch monitoring process ends. Later, based on the presence of this specific area passage flag, a process for generating a special gaming state will be performed.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
FIG. 72 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (step A34) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (step A801). If a remaining ball error is occurring (step A801; Y), the process proceeds to step A803. If the remaining ball error is not occurring (step A801; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A802). When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A802; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is terminated. When the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A802; Y), a process for ending the small hit after step A803 is performed.

That is, the process for ending the small hit is performed after all the remaining balls in the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged. However, if there is a residual ball error in which the discharge cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time has passed since the game ball finally flowed into the first special variable winning device 38, the time required for discharge has sufficiently passed. As a result, the process shifts to the process for ending the small hit. Of course, if there is a remaining ball error, it is possible not to shift to the process for ending the small hit. Therefore, the process of step A801 may not be performed.

In the process for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether or not the specific area has been passed (step A803). When the game ball flows into and passes through the specific area 38h, it is detected by the specific area switch 38d and the specific area passage flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not the specific area has been passed based on the presence or absence of the specific area passage flag. When the specific area has been passed (step A803; Y), the process proceeds to step A811 to generate a special gaming state. If there is no passage through the specific area (step A803; N), the process proceeds to step A804 to end the small hit game state and perform a process for enabling the special figure variation display game to be executed.

In the process for ending the small hit game state after step A804 and enabling the special figure variation display game to be executed, 10 related to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A804), and the special figure game process number is set. The processing number is saved in the area (step A805). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A806), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A807). Then, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A808), the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared (step A809), and the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

On the other hand, when there is a passage through a specific area (step A803; Y) and a process for generating a special game state after step A810 is performed, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area to prepare (step A810), and a production command is produced. Perform the setting process (step A811). Next, the V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A812), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A813).

After that, it is saved in the signal external information output data area regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (step A814), and the test signal regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device is turned on). The operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Then, the number during the jackpot is saved in the game state display number area (step A816), the round number upper limit value table is set (step A817), and the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (this embodiment). In the case of, 10) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step A818). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A819), and the initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A820). 10 rounds are set as the upper limit of the number of rounds, but since the small hit operation corresponds to the first round, by setting 1 as the initial value of the number of rounds, 9 rounds are released in the special game state. I am doing it.

After that, 3 related to fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A821), and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A822). Further, the V jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A823), the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting process (step A824) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A808.

With the above configuration, the following characteristic game progress is possible.
When the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in the normal game state ST1 and a big hit with electric support is obtained, the special game state ST2 is passed to the specific game state ST3 (the first big hit). Since the normal variable winning device 37 is opened in the specific game state ST3, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37. Further, since the second start memory number becomes 0 by executing the special figure 2 variation display game, one second start memory is generated if the normal variation winning device 37 is won. Since the execution time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the specific game state ST3 is secured to be sufficiently long, the second start memory is almost certainly generated.

The special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit, and when the big hit is made, the game shifts to the special gaming state ST2. In addition, when it becomes a small hit, it shifts to the small hit game state ST4. The first special variable winning device 38, which is opened in the small hit game state ST4, almost certainly flows into the specific area 38h (V wins) when the game ball flows in, and flows into the specific area 38h. In this case, the game shifts to the special gaming state ST2, so that the player can be interested in winning the first special variable winning device 38. That is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the special game state ST2 is almost certainly reached (the second big hit), so that the special figure 2 variable display game is a very interesting special figure variable display game. Become.

If the big hit derived by the big hit or the V prize in the small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game executed in the specific game state ST3 is a big hit without electric support, the normal game state ST1 is set after the end of the special game state ST2. Transition. In this case, since one second start memory is stored in the specific game state ST3, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the normal game state ST1. Since this special figure 2 variable display game will almost certainly be a big hit or a small hit as described above, the special game state ST2 will occur again (the third big hit). Therefore, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the normal game state ST1, it is shown that there is a very high possibility that the effect mode is set to the second chance mode and the game is changed to the specific game state ST3.
That is, if a big hit with electric support occurs in the normal game state ST1, at least two more big hits are almost guaranteed, and the game can be very entertaining.

In addition, if the jackpot derived by the big hit or the V prize in the small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game executed in the specific game state ST3 is a big hit with electric support, it is specified after the end of the special game state ST2. Since the game shifts to the game state ST3, two more big hits are almost guaranteed.

Here, as the end condition of the specific game state ST3, the special figure 1 variable display game is performed 10 times, but this condition is the first start memory that remains when the specific game state ST3 is entered. This is to prevent the specific game state ST3 from ending even if the special figure 1 variable display game is executed so as not to be disadvantageous to the player.
Therefore, the number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed as the end condition of the specific game state ST3 may be any number of times such that such an unfavorable event does not occur, and at least four times, which is the upper limit of the first start memory. Special Figure 1 The specific game state ST3 may not be terminated even if the variable display game is executed. Therefore, the specific game state ST3 may be terminated when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times of 5 times or more.
Of course, the specific game state ST3 may be terminated when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times of 4 times or less, and in this way, a big hit is obtained unless the second start memory is quickly generated. It is possible to have a game-like property of losing the right.

In addition, the average value of the execution time of the 10th special figure 1 variation display game in which the condition for ending the specific game state ST3 is satisfied is the 1st to 9th special figure 1 variation display games in the specific game state ST3. It may be made longer than the average value of the execution time.
By doing so, it is possible to have a time margin for generating the second start memory, and it is possible to prevent the specific game state ST3 from ending without being able to generate the second start memory. it can.
Further, the average value of the execution time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state ST1 may be longer than the average value of the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal game state ST1.
By doing so, the interval between the continuous special gaming states ST2 can be lengthened, and it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

Further, the end timing of the specific game state ST3 may be when the 10th special figure 1 variation display game ends or when the 1st special figure 2 variation display game ends, or when the 10th special figure 1 variation display game ends. This may be the case when the variable display ends in the display game or when the variable display ends in the first special figure 2 variable display game.
That is, the end timing may be either the start time or the end time of the stop time.

Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed in the specific game state ST3, the second start memory is not generated, which is disadvantageous to the player (transition to the special game state ST2). It may be possible to notify about the fact (less likely).
In particular, the second start memory is not generated only during the execution of the tenth special figure 1 variable display game in which the condition for ending the specific game state ST3 is satisfied, which is disadvantageous to the player. May be made to notify about.
Further, in the tenth special figure 1 variable display game in which the condition for ending the specific game state ST3 is satisfied, when the variable display ends without the second start memory occurring, the specific game is stopped at the stop time. The end notification, which is the notification that the state ST3 ends, may be performed.
However, if the second start memory occurs during the stop time, the end notification may be stopped and a notification to shift to the specific game state ST3 may be performed.

Further, in the first special figure 2 variation display game in which the condition for ending the specific game state ST3 is satisfied, when the second start memory occurs, the special game state ST2 is followed by the special game state ST2 again. It is also possible to perform a consecutive villa notification to notify that there is a possibility that
Further, in the first special figure 2 variation display game in which the condition for ending the specific game state ST3 is satisfied, if the variation time ends without the second start memory occurring, the specific game is in the stop time. The end notification, which is the notification that the state ST3 ends, may be performed.
However, if the second start memory occurs during the stop time, the end notification may be stopped and the consecutive villa notification may be performed.

Further, when the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 in the state where the second start memory exists in the special game state ST2, the effect mode is set to the second chance mode in the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory. However, when the second start memory occurs in the normal game state ST1, the effect mode may be set to the second chance mode or may be left as the normal mode in the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory. ..
Also, regarding the selection of the variation pattern, the first is when the second start memory is present in the special game state ST2 and the second start memory is generated in the normal game state ST1 and when the second start memory is generated in the normal game state ST1. 2 Special figure 2 based on the start memory The selection mode of the variation pattern for the variation display game may be different.
For example, when the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 in the state where the second start memory exists in the special game state ST2, the identification information is provisionally displayed in the middle of the special figure variation display game as a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. It is possible to select a re-variation display pattern in which the variation display is performed again after the game is stopped, and the re-variation pattern may not be selected when the second start memory occurs in the normal game state ST1.

Further, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game may be set as either a big hit or a small hit, and the off result may not be selected. By doing so, the transition to the special gaming state ST2 is surely performed, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be made into a more interesting special figure variable display game. Further, the operation of the lever member 38i may be controlled so that the game ball flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 always flows into the specific region 38h (V winning). By doing so, the transition to the special gaming state ST2 is surely performed, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be made into a more interesting special figure variable display game.

Further, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 may be configured as an integrated unit. In this case, it may be provided at a position where a prize can be won only by right-handed or left-handed.

From the above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, among the starting conditions The first game execution means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first game as a game based on the establishment of the first start condition, and the second game as a game based on the establishment of the second start condition among the start conditions. A possible second game execution means (game control device 100) and a first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) that can be converted into an operating state based on the derivation of a special result. A second variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37) that can be converted into a first state in which the second starting condition cannot be satisfied and a second state in which the second starting condition can be satisfied is provided. There are a special result and a second special result, and the first variable winning device includes a third variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) and a fourth variable winning device (first special) having a specific area 38h. There is a variable winning device 38), a first special gaming state in which the third variable winning device can be converted into an operating state based on the derivation of the first special result or the inflow into the specific area 38h, and the derivation of the second special result. It is possible to execute the second special game state in which the fourth variable winning device can be converted into the operating state based on the above, and the probability of obtaining the first special result is the same value in both the first game and the second game. There is always a constant value.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the target location changes depending on the situation.
In addition, it is possible to make the player highly interested in winning the first special variable winning device 38 provided with the specific area 38h, which is one of the conditions for generating the special gaming state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in a game machine that can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the game is executed based on the winning in the starting area and the result of the game becomes a special result, the starting winning opening that forms the starting area. 36, the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 and the normal variable winning device 37, which form a starting area and can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won. An operation state control means (game control device 100) that controls one of the operation states and the second operation state, which is easier to win than the first operation state, and a game to the start winning opening 36. A first game execution means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first game as a game based on the winning of a ball, and a second game capable of executing a second game as a game based on winning of a game ball to the ordinary variable winning device 37. Two game execution means (game control device 100) and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 capable of converting a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won into an open state in which a game ball can be won, based on the derivation of a special result. The special results include the first special result and the second special result, and the special variable winning device includes the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39. The special variable winning device 38 is provided with a specific area 38h through which the winning game balls can flow, and the second special variable winning device 39 can be converted into an open state based on the derivation of the first special result or the inflow into the specific area 38h. The first special game state can be executed, and based on the derivation of the second special result, the second special game state capable of converting the first special variable winning device 38 into the open state can be executed, and the first special result and the first special result can be executed. The probability of becoming is the same value in both the first game and the second game and is always a constant value, and the first special result is based on the type of the first special result or the lottery result based on the inflow to the specific area 38h. It is possible to enter the second operation state after the end of the game state, and in the second game, the probability of the second special result is higher than the probability of the loss, and the first special variable winning device 38 is used for the game. When the ball wins a prize, the probability of flowing into the specific area 38h is higher than the probability of not flowing into the specific area 38h.
Therefore, it is possible to give the game a game property that has never existed before, and to improve the interest of the game.

The execution time of the second game in the second operating state is longer than the execution time of the first game in the first operating state.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

The first start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the first start memory, which is the right to execute the first game as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36, up to a predetermined upper limit, and the normal variation. A second start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of second start memories, which is the right to execute the second game as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the winning device 37, is provided. The upper limit number that can store the second start memory is smaller than the upper limit number that can store the first start memory.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

<Special figure fluctuation display game and decoration special figure fluctuation display game>
Next, the special figure variation display game in the batch display device 50 and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 82.
For example, as shown in FIG. 73A, a first decorative game display unit 81 for displaying the first decorative game among the decorative special figure variation display games is provided in the center of the display area of the display device 41. The first decorative game display unit 81 displays the decorative special figure variable display game by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information.

At the lower right of the display area of the display device 41, a second decoration game display unit 82 for displaying the second decoration game among the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display unit 82 has identification information in each area of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, similarly to the first decoration game displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81. After changing the display, stop and display the result. The second decorative game display unit 82 displays identification information (small symbol) that is relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbol) displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81.

Further, in the lower center of the display area of the display device 41, a standby storage display unit 83 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided.
The decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game). If this is the case, the standby storage display unit 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (first start memory) that is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game. In this case, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby storage display unit 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the first start memory, and the leftmost decorative special figure start memory display is stored first in the first start. Decorative special figure corresponding to memory It is displayed side by side in the order of memory so that it becomes a memory display, and it shifts to the left each time it is digested.

In addition, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 corresponds to the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display). In the case of a game), the standby storage display unit 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (second start memory) that is the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game. In this case, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby storage display unit 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the second start memory, and the leftmost decorative special figure start memory display is stored first in the second start. Decorative special figure corresponding to memory It is displayed side by side in the order of memory so that it becomes a memory display, and it shifts to the left each time it is digested.
Further, the standby memory display unit 83 may suggest the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory. It is possible.

On the left side of the standby storage display unit 83, an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84. Further, the running memory display unit 84 suggests the result and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure variation display game currently being executed by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running memory display unit 84. It is possible.
In the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41, a first start memory number display unit 85a for displaying the first start memory number (special figure 1 hold number) and a second start memory number (special figure 2 hold number) are displayed. A second start storage number display unit 85b to be displayed is provided.

73 and 74 show a case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is a “big hit”. FIG. 73 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 74 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 73 (a), the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0 during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is the result mode of "off" (LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamps A1 to A7 are turned off). (Aspects to be used). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 73A, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is also the result mode of "off" (a mode in which the LED lamps B0 are turned on and the LED lamps B1 to B7 are turned off). It has become.

Further, here, since the stop display time of the special figure 1 variation display game is in progress, the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the display device 41 has the first The numerical value of the start storage number display unit 85a is "1", the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b is "0", one is in the standby storage display unit 83, and one is in the running storage display unit 84. Is displayed with 0 decorative special figure start memory displays (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory). Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 corresponds to "one special figure hold" (the mode in which the LED lamp C0 is turned on and the LED lamp C1 is turned off (the mode in which the LED lamp C0 is turned on and the LED lamp C1 is turned off). (See FIG. 4D)), and the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 corresponds to “no special figure hold” (the LED lamps C2 and C3 are turned off (FIG. 4 (d)). d) See)).

And here, since the game result is "out of place", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. Special Figure 1 When the variable time of the variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is the running memory display. Along with the display of shifting to the unit 84, the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes. Here, since the first start memory is digested and becomes 0, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 becomes 0. The numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a is "0". Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 is changed to correspond to the “no special figure hold” mode (LED lamps C0 and C1 are turned off (FIG. 4 (FIG. 4)). d) See)).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, the display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and displays all at once. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game starts. Specifically, the variable display of the identification information (large symbol) starts in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first decorative game display unit 81, and the left area of the second decorative game display unit 82, The variable display of the identification information (small symbol) starts in each of the middle area and the right area. Further, the special figure 1 display 51 indicates a fluctuation, that is, a mode corresponding to "changing" (a state in which the LED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit and a state in which the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are lit The display (see FIG. 4B) starts in the mode of alternately switching the above. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time starts, the special figure fluctuation display game and the decorative special figure fluctuation display game start, but the fluctuation display does not start, and the first predetermined from the start of the fluctuation time. When the time has passed, the variable display of the special figure variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game starts.

When the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure hold) is generated during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, the display device 41 shows as shown in FIG. As the number of the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby storage display unit 83 changes, the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 hold display 53 The display mode of is changed.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t11), as shown in FIGS. 73 (d) and 74, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "big hit" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the result modes of the “big hit”.

Further, here, since the game result is "big hit", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t12), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 1 The variable time of the variable display game starts (t13). Special Figure 1 When the variable time of the variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 73 (f), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is the running memory display. Along with the display of shifting to the unit 84, the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

In the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special game state, and then the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the variable time. 2 The decorative game display unit 82 reappears. That is, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 become invisible at the same time as the start of the special game state, and become visible at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time. Then, the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 first display the result of the previous special figure variation display game. Here, since the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "333" (see FIG. 73 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 73 (e) and 74, "333" is displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time. The first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 appear in a state where is stopped and displayed (t13). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t13 to t14). The display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as those before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 73 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 74, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t11 to t14).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t14), as shown in FIG. 74, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t14 to t15), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 73 (f). t15 to t16). After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t16), and the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t16 to t17). (T17 to t19).

As shown in FIG. 73 (g), the identification information of the first decorative game display unit 81 starts low-speed fluctuation in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and the left fluctuation display area. , The right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area are temporarily stopped in this order. In the temporarily stopped state, the identification information is displayed in a swaying manner, indicating that the information has not been completely stopped. As shown in FIG. 73 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t18).
In FIG. 74, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81. Therefore, in FIG. 74, “t14” is the timing at which the identification information (left symbol) displayed in the left fluctuation display area starts low-speed fluctuation, and the identification information (right symbol) displayed in the right fluctuation display area and the medium fluctuation display. The timing at which the identification information (middle symbol) displayed in the area starts low-speed fluctuation is between "t14" and "t15". Further, "t16" is the timing at which the left symbol ends the high-speed fluctuation (starts the low-speed fluctuation), and the timing at which the right symbol and the middle symbol end the high-speed fluctuation (starts the low-speed fluctuation) is "t16" and "t17". Between. Further, "t17" is the timing when the left symbol starts the temporary stop, "t18" is the timing when the right symbol starts the temporary stop, and the timing when the middle symbol starts the temporary stop is "t18" and "t19". Is between.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t14 to t19), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t14 to t19), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 1 display 51) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "changing".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t19), as shown in FIGS. 73 (i) and 74, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "off" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state. If there is a start memory, the next special figure variation display game will start. If the result is a big hit, it is in the first special gaming state, and if it is a small hit, it is in the second special gaming state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 73 (i) is different from FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 73 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the "hit" result mode. The display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”, the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next is executed. At the start of (t13 to t14), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of the “big hit”, and the special figure 1 of the batch display device 50 The display mode of the display 51 is a result mode of "big hit".
Therefore, in this case, the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are in a consistent state. , The variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display 51) and the variation of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next. The display (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed after the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "small hit", or when the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "missing" is executed, special figure 1 is executed. Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned, and then the next The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next are started.

That is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the special figure 1 display 51 The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next, in a state in which the stop symbols of Will be started.
Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game, the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the special figure 2 display are similarly executed. With the stop symbol of 52 consistent, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next. And will be started.

75 and 76 show a case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”. FIG. 75 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 76 is an example of a timing chart. Since FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b) are diagrams showing the same states as those of FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.
Special Figure 1 When a game ball wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 and a second start memory (second special figure hold) occurs during execution of the variable display game, the display device 41 is shown in FIG. 75 (c). In, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t21), as shown in FIGS. 75 (d) and 76, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "big hit" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the result modes of the “big hit”.

Further, here, since the game result is a "big hit", the first start memory number is 0, and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t22), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 2 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game starts (t23). Special Figure 2 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 75 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (f), a display is performed in which the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 shifts to the running storage display unit 84, and the second start is performed. The numerical value of the storage number display unit 85b changes. Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

In the present embodiment, from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the transition effect (the effect of shifting the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 to the running memory display unit 84). The time is when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game (FIGS. 73 (a), (b), 73 (e), (f), 75 (a), (B)), when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game, and when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed after the special figure 1 variable display game (Fig. 75 (Fig. 75). e) and (f) are the same as when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game. In the present embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the transition effect is set to, for example, the second predetermined time shorter than the first predetermined time (the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display).

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory has a circular shape, and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory has a hexagonal shape. That is, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory are different from each other, so that the decorative feature being displayed is displayed. Figure Notifies which of the first start memory and the second start memory the start memory display corresponds to. Of course, by making the display mode (for example, color or size) other than the shape different, it is notified whether the decorative special figure start memory display being displayed corresponds to the first start memory or the second start memory. You may try to do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special gaming state, and then the first decorative game is displayed at the same time as the start of the variable time. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 reappear. Then, the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 first display the result of the previous special figure variation display game. Here, since the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "333" (see FIG. 75 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 75 (e) and 76, "333" is displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time. The first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 appear in a state where is stopped and displayed (t23). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t23 to t24). The display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as those before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 75 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 76, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t21 to t24).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t24), as shown in FIG. 76, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t24 to t25), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 75 (f). t25 to t26). After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t26), and the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t26 to t27). (T27 to t29). As shown in FIG. 75 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t28).
In FIG. 76, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t24 to t29), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t24 to t29), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 2 display 52) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "changing".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t29), as shown in FIGS. 75 (i) and 76, the variable display ends on the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "off" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 75 (i) is different from FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 75 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the "hit" result mode. The display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”, the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next is executed. At the start of (t23 to t24), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of "big hit". Further, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the result of the previous special figure 2 variable display game is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50. Therefore, when the result of the previous special figure 2 variable display game is "off", as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to In t24), the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 is the result mode of “off”.

Therefore, there is a case where the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 2 is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "big hit". When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 2 display 52 are aligned. The variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (variable display on the special figure 2 display 52) and the decorative special figure variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

Further, in the case where the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "small hit". Similarly, when the two variable display game is executed, the stop symbol (small hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 2 display 52 The variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next are started in a state of inconsistency with. The Rukoto.

That is, there is a case where the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 2 is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "hit". When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbol (hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 2 display 52 are aligned. In this state, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next are started. Become.

In the case where the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 variable display is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "hit". In order to start the variable display in a state where the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 are aligned when the game is executed. At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t23 to t24) to be executed next, the result mode of "off" is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 (previous game). The result (“hit” result mode) may be displayed and then the “miss” result mode may be displayed, or the “miss” result mode may be displayed without displaying the previous game result). There is a need to. Alternatively, it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 2 display 52 at the start (t23 to t24) of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next.

Then, the player may be given the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the special figure start memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 are inconsistent, they are inconsistent. Since the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is started, it is possible to prevent the game situation from being erroneously recognized and to the player. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

77 and 78 show a case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”. FIG. 77 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 78 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 77 (a), the first start memory number is 0 and the second start memory number is 1 during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is the result mode of "off". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 77 (a), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is also a result mode of “off”.

And here, since the game result is "out of place", the first start memory number is 0, and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. Special Figure 2 When the variable time of the variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is the running memory display. Along with the display of shifting to the unit 84, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, and displays all at once. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts.
When the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure hold) occurs during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41 shows as shown in FIG. 77 (c). The numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes in the batch display device 50.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t31), as shown in FIGS. 77 (d) and 78, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "big hit" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the result modes of the “big hit”.

Further, here, since the game result is "big hit", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t32), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 1 The variable time of the variable display game starts (t33). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (f), a display is performed in which the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 shifts to the running storage display unit 84, and the first start is performed. The numerical value of the storage number display unit 85a changes. Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special gaming state, and then the first decorative game is displayed at the same time as the start of the variable time. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 reappear. Then, the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 first display the result of the previous special figure variation display game. Here, since the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "333" (see FIG. 77 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 77 (e) and 78, "333" is displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time. The first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 appear in a state where is stopped and displayed (t33). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t33 to t34). , The display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 77 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game also starts when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 78, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t31 to t34).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t34), as shown in FIG. 78, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t34 to t35), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 77 (f) is performed ( t35 to t36). After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t36), and the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t36 to t37), and eventually a temporary stop state is established. (T37 to t39). As shown in FIG. 77 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t38).
In FIG. 78, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t34 to t39), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 1 display 51) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "changing".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t39), as shown in FIGS. 77 (i) and 78, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "off" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 77 (i) of FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (i) is different. Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 77 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the "hit" result mode. The display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”, the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next is executed. At the start of (t33 to t34), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of "big hit". Further, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the result of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50. Therefore, when the result of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is "off", as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to In t34), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50 is the result mode of “off”.

Therefore, there is a case where the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "big hit". When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned. The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (variable display on the special figure 1 display 51) and the decorative special figure variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

Further, there is a case where the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 2 is next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "small hit". Similarly, when the 1 variable display game is executed, the stop symbol (small hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next are started in a state where The Rukoto.

That is, there is a case where the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned. In this state, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next are started. Become.

When the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "hit" is followed by the special figure 1 variable display In order to start the variable display in a state where the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned when the game is executed. At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t33 to t34) to be executed next, the result mode of "off" is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 (previous game). The result (“hit” result mode) may be displayed and then the “miss” result mode may be displayed, or the “miss” result mode may be displayed without displaying the previous game result). There is a need to. Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t33 to t34) to be executed next, it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 1 display 51.

Then, the player may be given the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the special figure start memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display 51 are inconsistent, they are inconsistent. Since the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, it is possible to prevent the game situation from being erroneously recognized and to the player. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

Next, a case will be described in which a probability control means (game control device 100) for setting a probability state in which a special result occurs is set to either a normal probability state or a high probability state higher than the normal probability state. ..
The change in the probability state is selected according to the type of special result that triggered the start of the special gaming state at the end of the special gaming state. The special result includes a normal jackpot that is set to the normal probability state after the end of the special game state and a probability variation jackpot that is set to the high probability state after the end of the special game state.

79 and 80 show a case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is “normal jackpot”. FIG. 79 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 80 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 79 (a), the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0 during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is the result mode of "off". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 79 (a), the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the result modes of the “probability variation jackpot”.

And here, since the game result is "out of place", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. Special Figure 1 When the variable time of the variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is the running memory display. Along with the display of shifting to the unit 84, the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes in the batch display device 50.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, the display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and displays all at once. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game starts.
Special Figure 1 When a game ball wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 and a second start memory (second special figure hold) occurs during execution of the variable display game, the display device 41 is shown in FIG. 79 (c). In, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t41), as shown in FIGS. 79 (d) and 80, the variable display ends on the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is a "normal jackpot", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the result modes of the "normal jackpot". In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the result modes of the “normal jackpot”.

Further, here, since the game result is "big hit", the first start memory number is 0, and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t42), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 2 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game starts (t43). Special Figure 2 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 79 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (f), a display is performed in which the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 shifts to the running storage display unit 84, and the second start is performed. The numerical value of the storage number display unit 85b changes. Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special gaming state, and then the first decorative game is displayed at the same time as the start of the variable time. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 reappear. Then, the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 first display the result of the previous special figure variation display game. Here, since the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "222" (see FIG. 79 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 79 (e) and 80, "222" is simultaneously displayed at the start of the fluctuation time. The first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 appear in a state where is stopped and displayed (t43). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t43 to t44). , The display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 does not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 is the same as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 79 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 80, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t41 to t44).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t44), as shown in FIG. 80, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t44 to t45), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 79 (f). t45 to t46). After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t46), and the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t46 to t47), and eventually the temporary stop state is established. (T47 to t49). As shown in FIG. 79 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t48).
In FIG. 80, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t44 to t49), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t44 to t49), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 2 display 52) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "changing".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t49), as shown in FIGS. 79 (i) and 80, the variable display ends on the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "off" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 79 (i) is different from FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 79 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the "hit" result mode. The display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 2 variable display to be executed next is executed. At the start of the game (t43 to t44), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of "normal jackpot". Further, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the result of the previous special figure 2 variable display game is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50. Therefore, when the result of the previous special figure 2 variable display game is "probability variation jackpot", as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43). In ~ t44), the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 is the result mode of the “probability variation jackpot”.

Therefore, there is a case where the result mode of "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "normal jackpot" next to the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (normal jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (probability variable jackpot symbol) of the special figure 2 display 52 are executed. ) Is inconsistent with the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (variable display on the special figure 2 display 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

Further, when the result mode of the "normal jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is the "probability variable jackpot" is next to the special figure 1. FIG. 2 Similarly, when executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (probability variable jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 (normal jackpot) are executed. The variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next are inconsistent with the symbol). It will be started.

That is, when the result mode of the "first jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the result is a "second jackpot" different from the first jackpot. When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the variable display game, the stop symbol (second jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the special figure 2 In a state where the stop symbol (first jackpot symbol) of the display 52 does not match, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the special figure variable display game will be started.
Here, one of the "normal jackpot" and the "probability variable jackpot" is defined as the "first jackpot" and the other is designated as the "second jackpot", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when one of "10R jackpot", "7R jackpot" and "2R jackpot" is set as "first jackpot" and the other one is set as "second jackpot", the stop symbol is similarly set. The variable display of the next game will start in an inconsistent state.
Also, when one of the "big hit with electric support" and "big hit without electric support" is set as "first big hit" and the other one is set as "second big hit", the stop symbols are matched in the same manner. The variable display of the next game will be started without this.

For example, in the case where the result mode of the "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is the "normal jackpot" is next to the special figure 1. FIG. 2 When executing the variable display game, the variable display is started in a state where the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 are aligned. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t43 to t44) to be executed next, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are provided with the result mode of "probability variation jackpot". You may display the display (the result mode of the previous game result (the result mode of the "normal jackpot") and then the result mode of the "probability change jackpot", or the result of the "probability change jackpot" without displaying the previous game result. It is necessary to display the mode). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t43 to t44) to be executed next, it is necessary to display the result mode of the "normal big hit" on the special figure 2 display 52.

Then, the player may be given the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the special figure start memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 are inconsistent, they are inconsistent. Since the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is started, it is possible to prevent the game situation from being erroneously recognized and to the player. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

81 and 82 show a case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game whose result is a “normal jackpot”. FIG. 81 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 82 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 81 (a), the first start memory number is 0 and the second start memory number is 1 during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is the result mode of "off". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 81 (a), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the result modes of the “probability variation jackpot”.

And here, since the game result is "out of place", the first start memory number is 0, and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. Special Figure 2 When the variable time of the variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is the running memory display. Along with the display of shifting to the unit 84, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, and displays all at once. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts.
When the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure hold) occurs during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41 shows as shown in FIG. 81 (c). The numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes in the batch display device 50.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t51), as shown in FIGS. 81 (d) and 82, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. Here, since the game result is a "normal jackpot", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the result modes of the "normal jackpot". In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the result modes of the “normal jackpot”.

Further, here, since the game result is "big hit", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t52), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 1 The variable time of the variable display game starts (t53). Special Figure 1 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 81 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (f), a display is performed in which the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 shifts to the running storage display unit 84, and the first start is performed. The numerical value of the storage number display unit 85a changes. Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special gaming state, and then the first decorative game is displayed at the same time as the start of the variable time. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed on the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. Here, since the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "222" (see FIG. 81 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 81 (e) and 82, "222" is displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time. The first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 appear in a state where is stopped and displayed (t53). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t53 to t54). , The display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 does not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 81 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 82, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t51 to t54).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t54), as shown in FIG. 82, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t54 to t55), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 81 (f). t55-t56). After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t56), and the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t56 to t57), and eventually the state is temporarily stopped. (T57 to t59). As shown in FIG. 81 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t58).
In FIG. 82, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t54 to t59), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t54 to t59), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 1 display 51) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "changing".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t59), as shown in FIGS. 81 (i) and 82, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "off" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 81 (i) is different from FIGS. 81 (a) to 81 (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 81 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the "hit" result mode. The display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 1 variable display to be executed next is executed. At the start of the game (t53 to t54), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of "normal jackpot". Further, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the result of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50. Therefore, when the result of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is "probability variation jackpot", as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53). In ~ t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50 is the result mode of the “probability variation jackpot”.

Therefore, there is a case where the result mode of "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "normal jackpot". FIG. 1 When executing a variable display game, a stop symbol (normal jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and a stop symbol (probability variable jackpot symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are executed. ) Is inconsistent with the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (variable display on the special figure 1 display 51) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

Further, when the result mode of the "normal jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is the "probability variable jackpot" is next to the special figure 2. FIG. 1 Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbol (probability variation jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 (normal jackpot) are executed. The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next are inconsistent with the symbol). It will be started.

That is, when the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. When the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the variable display game, the stop symbol (second jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the special figure 1 In a state where the stop symbol (first jackpot symbol) of the display 51 does not match, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the special figure variable display game will be started.
Here, one of the "probability variable jackpot" and the "normal jackpot" is defined as the "first jackpot" and the other is designated as the "second jackpot", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when one of "10R jackpot", "7R jackpot" and "2R jackpot" is set as "first jackpot" and the other one is set as "second jackpot", the stop symbol is similarly set. The variable display of the next game will start in an inconsistent state.
Also, when one of the "big hit with electric support" and the "big hit without electric support" is set as the "first big hit" and the other one is set as the "second big hit", the stop symbols are similarly matched. The variable display of the next game will be started without this.

For example, in the case where the result mode of the "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is the "normal jackpot" is next to the special figure 2. FIG. 1 When executing a variable display game, variable display is started in a state where the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t53 to t54) to be executed next, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are provided with the result mode of "probability variation jackpot". You may display the display (the result mode of the previous game result (the result mode of the "normal jackpot") and then the result mode of the "probability change jackpot", or the result of the "probability change jackpot" without displaying the previous game result. It is necessary to display the mode). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t53 to t54) to be executed next, it is necessary to display the result mode of the "normal big hit" on the special figure 1 display 51.

Then, the player may be given the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the special figure start memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display 51 are inconsistent, they are inconsistent. Since the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, it is possible to prevent the game situation from being erroneously recognized and to the player. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the first display device 41 If the stop symbol of the decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50 are matched, they remain in the matched state. The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and if they are not consistent, the special figure remains in the inconsistent state. Since the variable display of the 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, the game can be smoothly progressed.

Further, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the first decorative game display unit 81 and the first of the display device 41 If the stop symbol of the two-decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 match, the special figure 2 variable display game remains in the matched state. And the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is started, and if it is not consistent, the special figure 2 variation display game and the special figure 2 are in the inconsistent state. FIG. 2 Decorative special figure corresponding to the variable display game Since the variable display of the variable display game is started, the game can be smoothly progressed.

Hereinafter, when the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 match at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2 The case where the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 match at the start of the variable display game is simply "matched". If there is, it is called.
Further, when the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 do not match at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 The case where the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 do not match at the start of the variable display game is simply "matched". If not ".

In the above description, as an example of "in the case of matching", a case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a case where the special figure 2 variable display game is followed by the special figure 2 variable Although the case of executing the display game is mentioned, the “case of matching” is not limited to these cases. For example, in the case where the result mode of "big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "big hit". When the variable display game is executed, or when the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 is stopped and displayed as the result mode of "off", the special figure 1 variable display whose result is "off". When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the game, it is also "when consistent".

Further, in the above description, as an example of "inconsistency", the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "hit". When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game (see FIGS. 75 and 76), the result mode of “missing” on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50 When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game (see FIGS. 77 and 78) in which is stopped and the result is "hit", the batch display device 50 The special figure 2 variable display game is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the above, and the result is the "second big hit". (See FIGS. 79 and 80) and when the result mode of "first jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "second jackpot". The case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game (see FIGS. 81 and 82) is mentioned, but the “inconsistent case” is limited to these cases. Not done. For example, when the result mode of "hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "missing", the special figure 2 variation is next to the special figure 1 variation display game. When the display game is executed, or when the result mode of "either big hit or small hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the result is "big hit or small hit". When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game which is "one of the hits", it is also "inconsistent".

Here, the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 starts low-speed fluctuation (starts fluctuation display) in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and then left. High-speed fluctuation is started at the same time in the fluctuation display area, right fluctuation display area, and medium fluctuation display area (low-speed fluctuation ends), and then high-speed fluctuation is performed in the order of left fluctuation display area, right fluctuation display area, and medium fluctuation display area. End (start low-speed fluctuation).
As shown in FIGS. 74, 76, 78, 80, and 82, the effect control device 300 stops and displays the desired result mode (here, “424”) on the first decorative game display unit 81. , The identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 is set at the start of high-speed fluctuation (t15, t25, t35, t45, t55) and at the end of high-speed fluctuation (t16, t26, t36, t46, t56). ).

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 74, 76, and 78, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333", the variation display starting from "333" starts (t14, t24, t34). Then, the effect control device 300 starts the fluctuation display starting from "333" from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123") at the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (t15, t25, t35). The first replacement process for replacing the variable display is executed. Further, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (t16, t26, t36), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode is displayed on the game result and the remaining fluctuation time (t16 to t19, t26 to t29, t36 to t39). The second replacement process is executed to replace the fluctuation display starting from the result mode calculated back based on the fluctuation pattern (whether or not the reach state is generated, etc.).

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 80 and 82, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is “222”, the variation display starting from “222” starts (t44, t54). Then, the effect control device 300 displays the fluctuation display starting from "222" at the start of high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (t45, t55), and the fluctuation display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123"). The first replacement process of replacing with is executed. Further, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (t46, t56), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode is displayed as the game result, the remaining fluctuation time (t46 to t49, t56 to t59), and the fluctuation pattern (reach state). The second replacement process is executed to replace the variable display starting from the result mode calculated back based on the presence / absence of occurrence, etc.).
The execution of these replacement processes is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 32).

In order to stop and display the desired result mode on the first decorative game display unit 81, it is possible to replace the large symbol during low-speed fluctuation or temporary stop display. However, in that case, the player may notice that the large symbol has been replaced, and the interest of the game may be reduced. On the other hand, by replacing the large symbol during high-speed fluctuation as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the large symbol has been replaced.

The timing of replacing the large symbol can be changed as appropriate during high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol.
In addition, the number of times the large symbol is replaced is not limited to two, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times to replace the large symbol may be one, and in that case, it is preferable to execute only the second replacement process without executing the first replacement process. Specifically, for example, the timing may be the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (or the timing after the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol and before the end of the high-speed fluctuation, or the large symbol. (It may be at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of), the fluctuation display starting from the result mode of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is replaced with the fluctuation display starting from the result mode calculated back based on the game result etc. It is good to execute the process. Further, when the number of times to replace the large symbol is a plurality of times, the last replacement process may be the second replacement process.

Further, the first decorative game display unit 81 does not perform the reach fluctuation from the high-speed fluctuation via the low-speed fluctuation, but may perform the reach fluctuation as it is from the high-speed fluctuation without passing through the low-speed fluctuation. When not passing through the low-speed fluctuation, for example, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol, the large symbol (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 is set to the desired reach mode (desired). You may perform the replacement process to replace it with the reach symbol).

On the other hand, the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 starts high-speed fluctuation at the same time in the left region, the right region, and the middle region (starts the fluctuation display), and then the left region, the right region, and the middle. End high-speed fluctuation (end fluctuation display) at the same time as the area.
As shown in FIGS. 74, 76, 78, 80, and 82, the effect control device 300 stops and displays the desired result mode (here, “424”) on the second decorative game display unit 82. , The identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is replaced at the end of the high-speed fluctuation (t19, t29, t39, t49, t59). Specifically, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbol, the third replacement process is performed to replace the small symbol stopped and displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82 with a desired result mode.
The execution of the third replacement process is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 32).

The timing of replacing the small symbol can be changed as appropriate during high-speed fluctuation of the small symbol. When the small symbol is replaced at a timing other than the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbol, the first replacement process for replacing the small symbol with the variation display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode may be executed, or the game result or A second replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display starting from the result mode calculated back based on the remaining fluctuation time, fluctuation pattern, and the like.
When executing the second replacement process for replacing the small symbols, it is not necessary to execute the third replacement process at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols.
Further, when executing the first replacement process for replacing the small symbol, the second replacement process for replacing the small symbol is executed after the first replacement process, or the high speed of the small symbol is executed. It is advisable to execute the third replacement process at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the number of times the small symbols are replaced may be once or may be a plurality of times. When the number of times the small symbols are replaced is one, it is preferable to execute only the second replacement process or only the third replacement process without executing the first replacement process. Further, when the number of times the small symbols are replaced is a plurality of times, the last replacement process may be the second replacement process or the third replacement process.

In the present embodiment, the time from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the fluctuation display is "when consistent" (for example, t13 to t14) and "when not consistent" (for example, t23 to t24, t33). ~ T34, t43 to t44, t53 to t54) are the same.
Further, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol is "when consistent" (for example, t14 to t15) and "when not consistent" (for example, t24 to t25, t34). ~ T35, t44 to t45, t54 to t55) are the same.
Further, the time from the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol is "when consistent" (for example, t15 to t16) and "when not consistent" (for example, t25 to). It is the same as t26, t35 to t36, t45 to t46, t55 to t56).

Further, the time from the start of the low-speed fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the low-speed fluctuation of the large symbol is "when consistent" (for example, t16 to t17) and "when not consistent" (for example, t26-). It is the same as t27, t36 to t37, t46 to t47, t56 to t57).
In addition, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large symbol to the start of the reach fluctuation of the large symbol is "when consistent" (for example, t17 to t18) and "when not consistent" (for example, t27). ~ T28, t37 to t38, t47 to t48, t57 to t58) are the same.
Further, the time from the start of the reach fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the fluctuation time is "when consistent" (for example, t18 to t19) and "when not consistent" (for example, t28 to t29, t38). ~ T39, t48 ~ t49, t58 ~ t59) are the same.

In this way, the time from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the fluctuation display, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol, and the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol Time to, the time from the start of the low-speed fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the low-speed fluctuation of the large symbol, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large symbol to the start of the reach fluctuation of the large symbol, and the reach of the large symbol. By making each time from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation time the same for "inconsistent" and "inconsistent", the variation display is started in an inconsistent state. The fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is started can be set to the same time as the fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is started in a consistent state. That is, it is not necessary to determine whether or not they are consistent when determining the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern).
It should be noted that at least one of these times may be different depending on whether the time is “consistent” or “inconsistent”. If they are different, it is necessary to determine whether or not they are consistent when determining the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern), so that the processing load increases accordingly.

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variablely displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is a special result. A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state when it becomes a mode, and as a variable display game, a first variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning to the start winning opening 36) of the start conditions. The first variable display means (special figure 1 display 51) capable of displaying (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second start condition of the start conditions are satisfied as the variable display game (to the normal variable winning device 37). Controls the second variable display means (special figure 2 display 52) capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning), the first variable display means, and the second variable display means. A game control means (game control device 100) to be played, a first decorative game corresponding to a variable display game and variable display of an identification symbol (large symbol), and a variable display game corresponding to a smaller identification than the first decorative game. A second decorative game in which a symbol (small symbol) is variablely displayed, an effect display means (display device 41) capable of displaying, and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect display means are provided. When the second variable display game is executed next to the one variable display game, the result mode that is stopped and displayed on the second variable display means at the start of the second variable display game and the stop display on the effect display means. There is a case where the result mode of the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) is not consistent with the result mode, and in that case, a process for making these result modes consistent is performed. Without any, the game control means starts the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game, and the effect control means is the first decorative game (and / or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game. ) Is configured to start the variable display of the identification symbol (see FIGS. 75 and 79).

Therefore, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) and the second stop symbol. 2 If the stop symbol of the variable display means (special figure 2 display 52) does not match, the second variable display game and the second variable display game corresponding to the second variable display game remain in the inconsistent state. Since the variable display of the 1-decoration game (and / or the 2nd decoration game) starts, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first variable display game may be a special FIG. 2 variable display game, and the second variable display game may be a special FIG. 1 variable display game (see FIGS. 77 and 81).
In this case, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) and the stop symbol. When the stop symbol of the second variation display means (special figure 1 display 51) does not match, the second variation display game and the second variation display game are supported in the inconsistent state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) is started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the above is not consistent, the result mode of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) becomes a special result mode (result mode of "hit"). At the end of the special gaming state that has occurred, the result mode that is stopped and displayed on the second variable display means (special figure 2 display 52) is a result mode other than the special result mode (result mode of "missing"). In addition, the number of start memories (first start memory) that is the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 0, and that of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The case where the number of start memories (second start memories) which is the execution right is one or more is included, and in that case, the game control means (game control device 100) becomes the first after the end of the special game state. 2 From the state in which the result mode other than the special result mode is stopped and displayed in the variable display means, the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game is started, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) is the special. After the end of the gaming state, the variation display starting from the special result mode is started as the variation display of the identification symbol in the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) corresponding to the second variation display game. (See FIGS. 75 and 79).

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the effect display means (display device 41). If the stop symbol of is a hit symbol and the stop symbol of the second variation display means (special figure 2 display 52) is an off symbol, the second variation display game and the second variation display are in that state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) corresponding to the game can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. ..

The first variable display game may be a special FIG. 2 variable display game, and the second variable display game may be a special FIG. 1 variable display game (see FIGS. 77 and 81).
In this case, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) hits. If it is a symbol and the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 1 display 51) is an off symbol, the second variable display game and the second variable display game corresponding to the second variable display game are supported in that state. Since the variable display of the 1-decoration game (and / or the 2nd decoration game) can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the special result mode at "at the end of the special gaming state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game becomes the special result mode" is not limited to the "hit" result mode. That is, the special result mode may be only the "big hit" result mode of the "hit" result modes, or only the "small hit" result mode of the "hits" result modes. It may be the result mode of "probability big hit" among the result modes of "hit", or only the result mode of "normal big hit" among the result modes of "hit". It may be good, it may be only the result aspect of "10R big hit" among the result aspects of "hit", or it may be only the result aspect of "7R hit" among the result aspects of "hit". , Only the result mode of "2R hit" among the result modes of "hit" may be used, or only the result mode of "big hit with electric support" among the result modes of "hit" may be used. , Only the result mode of "big hit without electric support" among the result modes of "hit" may be used.

In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, the game control means (game control device 300) is in a state in which the start memory that is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start memory that is the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game are stored. 2 The variable display game is configured to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 2 variable display game next to the special figure 1 variable display game, a special game generated in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a special result mode. At the end of the state, the number of first start memories may not be 0 (that is, the number of first start memories may be 1 or more) as long as the number of second start memories is 1 or more.
That is, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game, the first variable display game is set as the special figure 1 variable display game, and the second variable display game is set as the special figure 2 variable display game. In order to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) after the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) in the display game, the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed. At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game is the special result mode, the start memory (second) that is the execution right of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) It is necessary to satisfy the condition that "the number of start memories) is one or more", but the number of start memories (first start memories) that is the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). It is not necessary to satisfy the condition that "is 0".

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 1 variable display game next to the special figure 2 variable display game, a special game generated in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result mode. At the end of the state, the first start memory number must be one or more and the second start memory number must be zero.
That is, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game, the first variable display game is set as the special figure 2 variable display game, and the second variable display game is set as the special figure 1 variable. In order to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) after the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the display game, the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the special result mode, the start memory (second) that is the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) The condition that "the number of start memory) is 0" and "the number of start memory (first start memory) that is the execution right of the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 1 or more. It is necessary to satisfy both of the conditions of ".

The game machine 10 may be a game machine in which the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 2 variable display game.
In this case, in order to execute the special figure 2 variable display game next to the special figure 1 variable display game, the end of the special gaming state generated in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special result mode. Occasionally, the number of second start memories needs to be one or more, and the number of first start memories needs to be zero.
That is, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 2 variable display game, the first variable display game is set as the special figure 1 variable display game, and the second variable display game is set as the special figure 2 variable display game. In order to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) after the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) in the display game, the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed. At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game is the special result mode, the start memory (first) that becomes the execution right of the "first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game)" The condition that "the number of start memory) is 0" and "the number of start memory (second start memory) that is the execution right of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is 1 or more. It is necessary to satisfy both of the conditions of ".

On the other hand, in this case, in order to execute the special figure 1 variable display game next to the special figure 2 variable display game, the special gaming state generated in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result mode. As long as the number of first start memories is 1 or more at the end of, the number of second start memories may not be 0 (that is, the number of second start memories may be 1 or more).
That is, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 2 variable display game, the first variable display game is set as the special figure 2 variable display game, and the second variable display game is set as the special figure 1 variable. In order to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) after the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the display game, the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed. At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the special result mode, the start memory (first) that is the execution right of the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) It is necessary to satisfy the condition that "the number of start memory) is one or more", but the number of start memory (second start memory) that is the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It is not necessary to satisfy the condition that "is 0".

In addition, the game machine 10 includes a first variable display game (one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) and a second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game). It may be a game machine that executes the other of the games) in the order of winning.
In this case, in order to execute the second variable display game next to the first variable display game, at the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the first variable display game becomes the special result mode, " Both the condition that "the number of start-up memories that are the execution right of the first variable display game is 0" and the condition that "the number of start-up memories that are the execution right of the second variable display game is 1 or more". Satisfy or, "The first start memory of the start memory that is the execution right of the first variable display game and the start memory that is the execution right of the second variable display game is the execution right of the second variable display game. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that "it is a start memory".

That is, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores the start memory that is the execution right of the first variable display game and the start memory that is the execution right of the second variable display game. In this state, it is possible to configure the variable display game (special figure variable display game) to be executed in the order of memory.
Then, when configured in this way, if the above-mentioned inconsistency occurs,
At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. And the number of start memories that are the execution rights of the first variable display game is 0, and the number of start memories that are the execution rights of the second variable display game is 1 or more.
At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. In addition, the number of start memories that are the execution right of the first variable display game is one or more, and the number of start memories that are the execution right of the second variable display game is one or more. The case where the start memory stored first is the start memory which is the execution right of the second variable display game is included, and in those cases,
After the end of the special game state, the game control means stops and displays a result mode other than the special result mode in the second variable display means, and then changes the identification information in the second variable display game. To start
After the end of the special gaming state, the effect control means starts from the special result mode as a variation display of the identification symbol in the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) corresponding to the second variation display game. It can be configured to start a variable display.

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) is a hit symbol. If the stop symbol of the second variable display means is an off symbol, the first decorative game (and / or the second decorative) corresponding to the second variable display game and the second variable display game remains in that state. Since the variable display of the game) can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs variable display of the identification symbol (large symbol) in the first decorative game, the display mode of the identification symbol is displayed. The variable display of the identification symbol in the first decorative game corresponding to the second variable display game can be converted into a low-speed variable display mode in which the identification symbol can be identified and a high-speed variable display mode in which the identification symbol is difficult to identify. The time from the start to the start of the low-speed fluctuation display mode via the high-speed fluctuation display mode is the result mode in which the second fluctuation display means is stopped and displayed at the start of the second fluctuation display game, and the effect display. When the result mode of the first decoration game stopped and displayed on the means is consistent (t14 to t16) and when is not consistent (t24 to t26, t34 to t36, t44 to t46, t54 to 56). Can be configured to be the same as.
With this configuration, the variable time can be set to the same time depending on whether the variable display is started in an inconsistent state or the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared with the configuration in which the time from the start of the fluctuation display of information (large symbol) to the start of low-speed fluctuation through high-speed fluctuation is different between "inconsistent" and "inconsistent". , It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs variable display of the identification symbol (small symbol) in the second decorative game, the display mode of the identification symbol is displayed. The identification symbol can be converted into a high-speed variable display mode that is difficult to identify, and after the variable display of the identification symbol in the second decorative game corresponding to the second variable display game starts, the variable display is displayed through the high-speed variable display mode. The time until the end (t14 to t19, t24 to t29, t34 to t39, t44 to t49, t54 to 59) is the result of being stopped and displayed on the second variable display means at the start of the second variable display game. When the aspect and the result aspect of the second decorative game stopped and displayed on the effect display means are consistent (t14 to t19) and inconsistent (t24 to t29, t34 to t39, t44 to t49). , T54 to 59) can be configured to be the same.
With this configuration, the variable time can be set to the same time depending on whether the variable display is started in an inconsistent state or the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared with the configuration in which the time from the start of the fluctuation display of information (small symbols) to the stop of the fluctuation display after high-speed fluctuation is different between "inconsistent" and "inconsistent". , It is possible to reduce the processing load.

In the present embodiment, both the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, but only one of the first decoration game and the second decoration game may be displayed. Specifically, for example, a mode for displaying the first decoration game and the second decoration game, a mode for displaying the first decoration game and not displaying the second decoration game, and a mode for displaying the second decoration game for the first There may be a mode in which the decoration game is not displayed.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 36 1st start winning opening (starting area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (starting area)
41 Display device (display means)
97 2nd start winning opening (starting area)
100 Game control device (starting storage means)
300 effect control device (effect control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the game is executed based on the winning in the starting area and the result of the game is a special result.
Display means that can display information about the game,
An effect control means for controlling the display in the display means,
A start storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit of start memories, which is the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball in the start area, is provided.
The effect control means
The information of the start memory corresponding to the game being executed can be displayed by the display mode of the running memory display corresponding to the start memory.
The selection of the display mode of the running storage display is performed by the selection using the first selection table and the selection using the second selection table selected by the selection result using the first selection table. A featured game machine.

Images